US20060014787A1 - Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof - Google Patents

Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20060014787A1
US20060014787A1 US11/223,501 US22350105A US2006014787A1 US 20060014787 A1 US20060014787 A1 US 20060014787A1 US 22350105 A US22350105 A US 22350105A US 2006014787 A1 US2006014787 A1 US 2006014787A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
methyl
alkyl
fluoro
trifluoromethyl
phenyl
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Abandoned
Application number
US11/223,501
Inventor
Thomas Kirrane
Daniel Kuzmich
John Proudfoot
Hossein Razavi
David Thomson
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc
Original Assignee
Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc filed Critical Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc
Priority to US11/223,501 priority Critical patent/US20060014787A1/en
Publication of US20060014787A1 publication Critical patent/US20060014787A1/en
Abandoned legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/16—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/18—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/16—Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for liver or gallbladder disorders, e.g. hepatoprotective agents, cholagogues, litholytics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P11/00—Drugs for disorders of the respiratory system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P13/00—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system
    • A61P13/12—Drugs for disorders of the urinary system of the kidneys
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P17/00—Drugs for dermatological disorders
    • A61P17/02—Drugs for dermatological disorders for treating wounds, ulcers, burns, scars, keloids, or the like
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02—Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00—Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08—Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/04—Centrally acting analgesics, e.g. opioids
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28—Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/02—Ophthalmic agents
    • A61P27/06—Antiglaucoma agents or miotics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P27/00—Drugs for disorders of the senses
    • A61P27/16—Otologicals
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00—Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04—Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10—Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P35/00—Antineoplastic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02—Immunomodulators
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00—Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/08—Antiallergic agents
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00—Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00—Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P7/00—Drugs for disorders of the blood or the extracellular fluid
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/04—Inotropic agents, i.e. stimulants of cardiac contraction; Drugs for heart failure
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/08—Vasodilators for multiple indications
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • A—HUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61—MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61P—SPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00—Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/12—Antihypertensives
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/04—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles
    • C07D209/10—Indoles; Hydrogenated indoles with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to carbon atoms of the hetero ring
    • C07D209/14—Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms, not forming part of a nitro radical
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/24—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/36—Radicals substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms
    • C07D213/38—Radicals substituted by singly-bound nitrogen atoms having only hydrogen or hydrocarbon radicals attached to the substituent nitrogen atom
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D213/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members
    • C07D213/04—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D213/60—Heterocyclic compounds containing six-membered rings, not condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom and three or more double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having three double bonds between ring members or between ring members and non-ring members having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with hetero atoms or with carbon atoms having three bonds to hetero atoms with at the most one bond to halogen, e.g. ester or nitrile radicals, directly attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D213/61—Halogen atoms or nitro radicals
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D215/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems
    • C07D215/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom
    • C07D215/12—Heterocyclic compounds containing quinoline or hydrogenated quinoline ring systems having no bond between the ring nitrogen atom and a non-ring member or having only hydrogen atoms or carbon atoms directly attached to the ring nitrogen atom with substituted hydrocarbon radicals attached to ring carbon atoms
    • C07D215/14—Radicals substituted by oxygen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D235/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, condensed with other rings
    • C07D235/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing 1,3-diazole or hydrogenated 1,3-diazole rings, condensed with other rings condensed with carbocyclic rings or ring systems
    • C07D235/04—Benzimidazoles; Hydrogenated benzimidazoles
    • C07D235/06—Benzimidazoles; Hydrogenated benzimidazoles with only hydrogen atoms, hydrocarbon or substituted hydrocarbon radicals, directly attached in position 2
    • C07D235/14—Radicals substituted by nitrogen atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D405/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D405/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D405/06—Heterocyclic compounds containing both one or more hetero rings having oxygen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, and one or more rings having nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07D—HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D471/00—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00
    • C07D471/02—Heterocyclic compounds containing nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms in the condensed system, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with one nitrogen atom, not provided for by groups C07D451/00 - C07D463/00 in which the condensed system contains two hetero rings
    • C07D471/04—Ortho-condensed systems

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to glucocorticoid mimetics or ligands, methods of making such compounds, their use in pharmaceutical compositions, and their use in modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function, treating disease-states or conditions mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, and other uses.
  • Glucocorticoids a class of corticosteroids, are endogenous hormones with profound effects on the immune system and multiple organ systems. They suppress a variety of immune and inflammatory functions by inhibition of inflammatory cytokines such as IL-1, IL-2, IL-6, and TNF, inhibition of arachidonic acid metabolites including prostaglandins and leukotrienes, depletion of T-lymphocytes, and reduction of the expression of adhesion molecules on endothelial cells (P. J. Barnes, Clin. Sci., 1998, 94, pp. 557-572; P. J. Barnes et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci., 1993, 14, pp. 436-441). In addition to these effects, glucocorticoids stimulate glucose production in the liver and catabolism of proteins, play a role in electrolyte and water balance, reduce calcium absorption, and inhibit osteoblast function.
  • glucocorticoids The anti-inflammatory and immune suppressive activities of endogenous glucocorticoids have stimulated the development of synthetic glucocorticoid derivatives including dexamethasone, prednisone, and prednisolone (L. Parente, Glucocorticoids , N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, pp. 35-54).
  • rheumatic diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis
  • dermatological diseases including psoriasis and pemphigus
  • allergic disorders including allergic rhinitis, atopic dermatitis, and contact dermatitis
  • pulmonary conditions including asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD)
  • COPD chronic obstructive pulmonary disease
  • Crohn disease ulcerative colitis
  • systemic lupus erythematosus autoimmune chronic active hepatitis, osteoarthritis, tendonitis, and bursitis
  • Glucocorticoids N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, pp. 161-174). They have also been used to help prevent rejection in organ transplantation.
  • glucocorticoids Unfortunately, in addition to the desired therapeutic effects of glucocorticoids, their use is associated with a number of adverse side-effects, some of which can be severe and life-threatening. These include alterations in fluid and electrolyte balance, edema, weight gain, hypertension, muscle weakness, development or aggravation of diabetes mellitus, and osteoporosis. Therefore, a compound that exhibited a reduced side effect profile while maintaining the potent anti-inflammatory effects would be particularly desirable especially when treating a chronic disease.
  • glucocorticoid receptor The effects of glucocorticoids are mediated at the cellular level by the glucocorticoid receptor (R. H. Oakley and J. Cidlowski, Glucocorticoids , N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, pp. 55-80).
  • the glucocorticoid receptor is a member of a class of structurally related intracellular receptors that when coupled with a ligand can function as a transcription factor that affects gene expression (R. M. Evans, Science, 1988, 240, pp. 889-895).
  • Other members of the family of steroid receptors include the mineralocorticoid, progesterone, estrogen, and androgen receptors.
  • Glucocorticoids N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety to better describe the state of the art.
  • transactivation the translocation of the ligand-bound glucocorticoid receptor to the nucleus is followed by binding to glucocorticoid response elements (GREs) in the promoter region of side-effect associated genes, for example phosphoenolpyruvate carboxy kinase (PEPCK) in the case of increased glucose production.
  • GREs glucocorticoid response elements
  • PEPCK phosphoenolpyruvate carboxy kinase
  • the anti-inflammatory effects are thought to be due to a process called transrepression.
  • transrepression is a process independent of DNA binding that results from inhibition of NF-kB and AP-1-mediated pathways, leading to down regulation of many inflammatory and immune mediators.
  • a number of the observed side effects may be due to the cross-reactivity of the currently available glucocorticoids with other steroid receptors, particularly the mineralocorticoid and progesterone receptors.
  • ligands for the glucocorticoid receptor that are highly selective and, upon binding, can dissociate the transactivation and transrepression pathways, providing therapeutic agents with a reduced side effect profile.
  • Assay systems to determine effects on transactivation and transrepression have been described (e.g., C. M. Bamberger and H. M. Schulte, Eur. J. Clin. Invest., 2000, 30 (suppl. 3), pp. 6-9).
  • Selectivity for the glucocorticoid receptor may be determined by comparing the binding affinity for this receptor with that of other steroid family receptors including those mentioned above.
  • Glucocorticoids also stimulate the production of glucose in the liver by a process called gluconeogenesis (J. E. Freidman et al, J. Biol. Chem., 1997, 272, 31475-31481) and it is believed that this process is mediated by transactivation events. Increased glucose production can exacerbate type II diabetes therefore a compound that selectivity inhibited glucocorticoid mediated glucose production may have therapeutic utility in this indication.
  • PCT International Publication No. WO 99/33786 discloses triphenylpropanamide compounds with potential use in treating inflammatory diseases.
  • PCT International Publication No. WO 00/66522 describes non-steroidal compounds as selective modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor potentially useful in treating metabolic and inflammatory diseases.
  • PCT International Publication No. WO 99/41256 describes tetracyclic modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor potentially useful in treating immune, autoimmune, and inflammatory diseases.
  • a compound that is found to interact with the glucocorticoid receptor in a binding assay could be an agonist or an antagonist.
  • the agonist properties of the compound could be evaluated in the transactivation or transrepression assays described above.
  • the compound may be found to have antagonist activity.
  • glucocorticoids stimulate glucose production in the liver. Increased glucose production induced by glucocorticoid excess can exacerbate existing diabetes, or trigger latent diabetes.
  • a ligand for the glucocorticoid receptor that is found to be an antagonist may be useful for treating or preventing diabetes.
  • the instant invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention includes compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
  • Selected compounds of formula (IA) include the following:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to the methods for making the compounds according to the invention by the methods as described herein.
  • the compounds according to the invention are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount, preferably a pharmaceutically effective amount, of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
  • the invention also provides a method of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • the invention further provides a method of treating a disease-state or condition mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • the invention also provides a method of treating a disease-state or condition selected from: type II diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular diseases, hypertension, arteriosclerosis, neurological diseases, adrenal and pituitary tumors, and glaucoma, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • a disease-state or condition selected from: type II diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular diseases, hypertension, arteriosclerosis, neurological diseases, adrenal and pituitary tumors, and glaucoma
  • the invention provides a method of treating a disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • the disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes is selected from: (i) lung diseases; (ii) rheumatic diseases or autoimmune diseases or joint diseases; (iii) allergic diseases; (iv) vasculitis diseases; (v) dermatological diseases; (vi) renal diseases; (vii) hepatic diseases; (viii) gastrointestinal diseases; (ix) proctological diseases; (x) eye diseases; (xi) diseases of the ear, nose, and throat (ENT) area; (xii) neurological diseases; (xiii) blood diseases; (xiv) tumor diseases; (xv) endocrine diseases; (xvi) organ and tissue transplantations and graft-versus-host diseases; (xvii) severe states of shock; (xviii) substitution therapy; and (xix) pain of inflammatory genesis.
  • the disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes is selected from: type I diabetes, osteoarthritis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, restenosis following percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, Alzheimer disease, acute and chronic pain, atherosclerosis, reperfusion injury, bone resorption diseases, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, thermal injury, multiple organ injury secondary to trauma, acute purulent meningitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, and syndromes associated with hemodialysis, leukopheresis, and granulocyte transfusion.
  • the invention further provides methods of treating the disease-states or conditions mentioned above, in a patient in need of such treatment, the methods comprising sequentially or simultaneously administering to the patient: (a) an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the present invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable glucocorticoid.
  • the invention further provides a method of assaying the glucocorticoid receptor function in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting the sample with a selected amount of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and (b) detecting the amount of the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof bound to glucocorticoid receptors in the sample.
  • the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof is labeled with a detectable marker selected from: a radiolabel, fluorescent tag, a chemiluminescent tag, a chromophore, and a spin label.
  • a detectable marker selected from: a radiolabel, fluorescent tag, a chemiluminescent tag, a chromophore, and a spin label.
  • the invention also provides a method of imaging the glucocorticoid receptor distribution in a sample or patient, the method comprising: (a) contacting the sample or administering to a patient a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof having a detectable marker; (b) detecting the spatial distribution and amount of the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof having a detectable marker bound to glucocorticoid receptors in the sample or patient using an imaging means to obtain an image; and (c) displaying an image of the spatial distribution and amount of the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof having a detectable marker bound to glucocorticoid receptors in the sample.
  • the imaging means is selected from: radioscintigraphy, nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), computed tomography (CT scan), or positron emission to
  • the invention also provides a kit for the in vitro diagnostic determination of the glucocorticoid receptor function in a sample, comprising: (a) a diagnostically effective amount of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof, and (b) instructions for use of the diagnostic kit.
  • C 1 -C 10 alkyl means an alkyl group or radical having 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
  • the term “lower” applied to any carbon-containing group means a group containing from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, as appropriate to the group (i.e., a cyclic group must have at least 3 atoms to constitute a ring).
  • alkylaryl means a monovalent radical of the formula Alk-Ar—
  • arylalkyl means a monovalent radical of the formula Ar-Alk- (where Alk is an alkyl group and Ar is an aryl group).
  • a term designating a monovalent radical where a divalent radical is appropriate shall be construed to designate the respective divalent radical and vice versa.
  • conventional definitions of terms control and conventional stable atom valences are presumed and achieved in all formulas and groups.
  • alkyl or “alkyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, 1-methylethyl (isopropyl), n-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylethyl (tert-butyl), and the like. It may be abbreviated “Alk”.
  • alkenyl or “alkenyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, isobutenyl, 3-methylbut-2-enyl, n-pentenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, decenyl, and the like.
  • alkynyl or “alkynyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethynyl, propynyl, n-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-methylbutynyl, n-pentynyl, heptynyl, octynyl, decynyl, and the like.
  • alkylene or “alkylene group” mean a branched or straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon divalent radical having the specified number of carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene, ethylene, propylene, n-butylene, and the like, and may alternatively and equivalently be denoted herein as -(alkyl)-.
  • alkenylene or “alkenylene group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon divalent radical having the specified number of carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene, propenylene, n-butenylene, and the like, and may alternatively and equivalently be denoted herein as -(alkylenyl)-.
  • alkynylene or “alkynylene group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon divalent radical containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethynylene, propynylene, n-butynylene, 2-butynylene, 3-methylbutynylene, n-pentynylene, heptynylene, octynylene, decynylene, and the like, and may alternatively and equivalently be denoted herein as -(alkynyl)-.
  • alkoxy or “alkoxy group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkO—, where Alk is an alkyl group. This term is exemplified by groups such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, pentoxy, and the like.
  • aryloxy means a monovalent radical of the formula ArO—, where Ar is aryl. This term is exemplified by groups such as phenoxy, naphthoxy, and the like.
  • oxo means a double-bonded divalent oxygen radical of the formula ( ⁇ O),
  • ⁇ O double-bonded divalent oxygen radical
  • alkyl group substituted by an “oxo” would be a group of the formula Alk-C(O)-Alk, wherein each Alk is an alkyl.
  • alkylcarbonyl alkylcarbonyl group
  • alkanoyl alkanoyl group
  • alkanoyl group mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkC(O)—, where Alk is alkyl or hydrogen.
  • arylcarbonyl means a monovalent radical of the formula ArC(O)—, where Ar is aryl.
  • acyl or “acyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula RC(O)—, where R is a substituent selected from hydrogen or an organic substituent.
  • R is a substituent selected from hydrogen or an organic substituent.
  • substituents include alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and the like. As such, the terms comprise alkylcarbonyl groups and arylcarbonyl groups.
  • acylamino or “acylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula RC(O)N(R)—, where each R is a substituent selected from hydrogen or a substituent group.
  • alkoxycarbonyl or “alkoxycarbonyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkO-C(O)—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • alkoxycarbonyl groups include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butyloxycarbonyl, and the like.
  • alkylaminocarbonyloxy or “alkylaminocarbonyloxy group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula R 2 NC(O)O—, where each R is independently hydrogen or lower alkyl.
  • alkoxycarbonylamino or “alkoxycarbonylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula ROC(O)NH—, where R is lower alkyl.
  • alkylcarbonylamino or “alkylcarbonylamino group” or “alkanoylamino” or “alkanoylamino groups” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkC(O)NH—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • exemplary alkylcarbonylamino groups include acetamido (CH 3 C(O)NH—).
  • alkylaminocarbonyloxy or “alkylaminocarbonyloxy group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkNHC(O)O—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • amino or “amino group” mean an —NH 2 group.
  • alkylamino or “alkylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula (Alk)NH—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • exemplary alkylamino groups include methylamino, ethylamino, propylamino, butylamino, tert-butylamino, and the like.
  • dialkylamino or “dialkylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula (Alk)(Alk)N—, where each Alk is independently alkyl.
  • exemplary dialkylamino groups include dimethylamino, methylethylamino, diethylamino, dipropylamino, ethylpropylamino, and the like.
  • substituted amino or “substituted amino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula —NR 2 , where each R is independently a substituent selected from hydrogen or the specified substituents (but where both Rs cannot be hydrogen).
  • substituents include alkyl, alkanoyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and the like.
  • alkoxycarbonylamino or “alkoxycarbonylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkOC(O)NH—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • ureido or “ureido group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula R 2 NC(O)NH—, where each R is independently hydrogen or alkyl.
  • halo means one or more hydrogen atoms of the group are replaced by halogen groups.
  • haloalkyl or “haloalkyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms thereof are each independently replaced with halogen atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as chloromethyl, 1,2-dibromoethyl, 1,1,1-trifluoropropyl, 2-iodobutyl, 1-chloro-2-bromo-3-fluoropentyl, and the like.
  • sulfanyl means a divalent radical of the formula —S—.
  • alkylthio or “alkylthio group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkS—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • exemplary groups include methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.
  • sulfonyl or “sulfonyl group” mean a divalent radical of the formula —SO 2 —.
  • sulfonylamino or “sulfonylamino group” mean a divalent radical of the formula —SO 2 NR—, where R is a hydrogen or a substituent group.
  • aminonosulfonyl or “aminosulfonyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula NR 2 SO 2 —, where R is each independently a hydrogen or a substituent group.
  • carbocycle means a stable aliphatic 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent or divalent radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring.
  • the carbocycle may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • the term comprises cycloalkyl (including spiro cycloalkyl), cycloalkylene, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylene, cycloalkynyl, and cycloalkynylene, and the like.
  • cycloalkyl or “cycloalkyl group” mean a stable aliphatic saturated 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, norbornanyl, adamantyl, tetrahydronaphthyl (tetralin), 1-decalinyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl, 1-methylcyclopropyl, 2-methylcyclopentyl, 2-methylcyclooctyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkenyl or “cycloalkenyl group” mean a stable aliphatic 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon double bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring.
  • the cycloalkenyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclononenyl, cyclodecenyl, norbornenyl, 2-methylcyclopentenyl, 2-methylcyclooctenyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkynyl or “cycloalkynyl group” mean a stable aliphatic 8- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 8- to 10-membered monocyclic or 12- to 15-membered bicyclic ring.
  • the cycloalkynyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary cycloalkynyl groups include, cyclooctynyl, cyclononynyl, cyclodecynyl, 2-methylcyclooctynyl, and the like.
  • cycloalkylene or “cycloalkylene group” mean a stable saturated aliphatic 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic divalent radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary cycloalkylene groups include cyclopentylene, and the like.
  • cycloalkenylene or “cycloalkenylene group” mean a stable aliphatic 5- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic divalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon double bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring.
  • the cycloalkenylene ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary cycloalkenylene groups include cyclopentenylene, cyclohexenylene, cycloheptenylene, cyclooctenylene, cyclononenylene, cyclodecenylene, norbornenylene, 2-methylcyclopentenylene, 2-methylcyclooctenylene, and the like.
  • cycloalkynylene or “cycloalkynylene group” mean a stable aliphatic 8- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic divalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 8- to 10-membered monocyclic or 12- to 15-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkynylene ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary cycloalkynylene groups include cyclooctynylene, cyclononynylene, cyclodecynylene, 2-methylcyclooctynylene, and the like.
  • aryl or “aryl group” mean an aromatic carbocyclic monovalent or divalent radical of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl or phenylene) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthranyl). Unless otherwise specified, the aryl ring may be attached at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • Exemplary aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, indanyl, indenyl, biphenyl, and the like. It may be abbreviated “Ar”.
  • heteroaryl or “heteroaryl group” mean a stable aromatic 5- to 14-membered, monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent or divalent radical which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic radical, having from one to four heteroatoms in the ring(s) independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, wherein any sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and any nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be oxidized or be quaternized.
  • the heteroaryl ring may be attached at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • exemplary and preferred heteroaryls include furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, indolizinyl, azaindolizinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, diazaindolyl, dihydroindolyl, dihydroazaindoyl, isoindolyl, azaiso
  • heterocycle means a stable non-aromatic 5- to 14-membered monocyclic or polycyclic, monovalent or divalent, ring which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring, having from one to three heteroatoms in the ring(s) independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, wherein any sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and any nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be oxidized or be quaternized.
  • the heterocyclyl ring may be attached at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure.
  • exemplary and preferred heterocycles include pyrrolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperazinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, hexahydropyrimidinyl, hexahydropyridazinyl, and the like.
  • optionally substituted aryl means that the aryl radical may or may not be substituted and that the description includes both substituted aryl radicals and aryl radicals having no substitution.
  • stable compound or “stable structure” mean a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic or diagnostic agent.
  • a compound which would have a “dangling valency” or is a carbanion is not a compound contemplated by the invention.
  • substituted means that any one or more hydrogens on an atom of a group or moiety, whether specifically designated or not, is replaced with a selection from the indicated group of substituents, provided that the atom's normal valency is not exceeded and that the substitution results in a stable compound. If a bond to a substituent is shown to cross the bond connecting two atoms in a ring, then such substituent may be bonded to any atom on the ring. When a substituent is listed without indicating the atom via which such substituent is bonded to the rest of the compound, then such substituent may be bonded via any atom in such substituent.
  • such piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or tetrazolyl group may be bonded to the rest of the compound of the invention via any atom in such piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or tetrazolyl group.
  • any substituent or group occurs more than one time in any constituent or compound, its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence.
  • the term “about” or “approximately” means within 20%, preferably within 10%, and more preferably within 5% of a given value or range.
  • prodrug or “prodrug derivative” mean a covalently-bonded derivative or carrier of the parent compound or active drug substance which undergoes at least some biotransformation prior to exhibiting its pharmacological effect(s).
  • prodrugs have metabolically cleavable groups and are rapidly transformed in vivo to yield the parent compound, for example, by hydrolysis in blood, and generally include esters and amide analogs of the parent compounds.
  • the prodrug is formulated with the objectives of improved chemical stability, improved patient acceptance and compliance, improved bioavailability, prolonged duration of action, improved organ selectivity, improved formulation (e.g., increased hydrosolubility), and/or decreased side effects (e.g., toxicity).
  • prodrugs themselves have weak or no biological activity and are stable under ordinary conditions.
  • Prodrugs can be readily prepared from the parent compounds using methods known in the art, such as those described in A Textbook of Drug Design and Development , Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard (eds.), Gordon & Breach, 1991, particularly Chapter 5: “Design and Applications of Prodrugs”; Design of Prodrugs , H. Bundgaard (ed.), Elsevier, 1985 ; Prodrugs: Topical and Ocular Drug Delivery , K. B. Sloan (ed.), Marcel Dekker, 1998 ; Methods in Enzymology , K. Widder et al. (eds.), Vol.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug means a prodrug of a compound of the invention which is, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible.
  • salt means an ionic form of the parent compound or the product of the reaction between the parent compound with a suitable acid or base to make the acid salt or base salt of the parent compound.
  • Salts of the compounds of the present invention can be synthesized from the parent compounds which contain a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, the salts are prepared by reacting the free base or acid parent compound with stoichiometric amounts or with an excess of the desired salt-forming inorganic or organic acid or base in a suitable solvent or various combinations of solvents.
  • pharmaceutically acceptable salt means a salt of a compound of the invention which is, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, generally water or oil-soluble or dispersible, and effective for their intended use.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salts and pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salts.
  • the compounds of the present invention are useful in both free base and salt form, in practice, the use of the salt form amounts to use of the base form. Lists of suitable salts are found in, e.g., S. M. Birge et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1977, 66, pp. 1-19, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt means those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free bases and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like, and organic acids such as acetic acid, trichloroacetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, ascorbic acid, aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, benzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, butyric acid, camphoric acid, camphorsulfonic acid, cinnamic acid, citric acid, digluconic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, glutamic acid, glycolic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, hemisulfic acid, heptanoic acid, hexanoic acid, formic acid, fum
  • pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salt means those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free acids and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable, formed with inorganic bases such as ammonia or hydroxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate of ammonium or a metal cation such as sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium, magnesium, iron, zinc, copper, manganese, aluminum, and the like. Particularly preferred are the ammonium, potassium, sodium, calcium, and magnesium salts.
  • Salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable organic nontoxic bases include salts of primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, quaternary amine compounds, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ion-exchange resins, such as methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, isopropylamine, tripropylamine, tributylamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, 2-diethylaminoethanol, dicyclohexylamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, methylglucamine, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, N-ethylpiperidine, tetramethylammonium compounds, tetraethylammonium
  • solvate means a physical association of a compound with one or more solvent molecules or a complex of variable stoichiometry formed by a solute (for example, a compound of Formula (I)) and a solvent, for example, water, ethanol, or acetic acid. This physical association may involve varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances, the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example, when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. In general, the solvents selected do not interfere with the biological activity of the solute. Solvates encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates, methanolates, and the like.
  • hydrate means a solvate wherein the solvent molecule(s) is/are H 2 O.
  • the compounds of the present invention as discussed below include the free base or acid thereof, their salts, solvates, and prodrugs and may include oxidized sulfur atoms or quaternized nitrogen atoms in their structure, although not explicitly stated or shown, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable forms thereof. Such forms, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable forms, are intended to be embraced by the appended claims.
  • isomers means compounds having the same number and kind of atoms, and hence the same molecular weight, but differing with respect to the arrangement or configuration of their atoms in space.
  • the term includes stereoisomers and geometric isomers.
  • stereoisomer or “optical isomer” means a stable isomer that has at least one chiral atom or restricted rotation giving rise to perpendicular dissymmetric planes (e.g., certain biphenyls, allenes, and spiro compounds) and can rotate plane-polarized light. Because asymmetric centers and other chemical structure exist in the compounds of the invention which may give rise to stereoisomerism, the invention contemplates stereoisomers and mixtures thereof.
  • the compounds of the invention and their salts include asymmetric carbon atoms and may therefore exist as single stereoisomers, racemates, and as mixtures of enantiomers and diastereomers. Typically, such compounds will be prepared as a racemic mixture.
  • stereoisomers can be prepared or isolated as pure stereoisomers, i.e., as individual enantiomers or diastereomers, or as stereoisomer-enriched mixtures.
  • individual stereoisomers of compounds are prepared by synthesis from optically active starting materials containing the desired chiral centers or by preparation of mixtures of enantiomeric products followed by separation or resolution, such as conversion to a mixture of diastereomers followed by separation or recrystallization, chromatographic techniques, use of chiral resolving agents, or direct separation of the enantiomers on chiral chromatographic columns.
  • Starting compounds of particular stereochemistry are either commercially available or are made by the methods described below and resolved by techniques well-known in the art.
  • enantiomers means a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other.
  • diastereoisomers or “diastereomers” mean stereoisomers which are not mirror images of each other.
  • racemic mixture or “racemate” mean a mixture containing equal parts of individual enantiomers.
  • non-racemic mixture means a mixture containing unequal parts of individual enantiomers.
  • geometrical isomer means a stable isomer which results from restricted freedom of rotation about double bonds (e.g., cis-2-butene and trans-2-butene) or in a cyclic structure (e.g., cis-1,3-dichlorocyclobutane and trans-1,3-dichlorocyclobutane). Because carbon-carbon double (olefinic) bonds, C ⁇ N double bonds, cyclic structures, and the like may be present in the compounds of the invention, the invention contemplates each of the various stable geometric isomers and mixtures thereof resulting from the arrangement of substituents around these double bonds and in these cyclic structures.
  • Some of the compounds of the invention can exist in more than one tautomeric form. As mentioned above, the compounds of the invention include all such tautomers.
  • enantiomers often exhibit strikingly different biological activity including differences in pharmacokinetic properties, including metabolism, protein binding, and the like, and pharmacological properties, including the type of activity displayed, the degree of activity, toxicity, and the like.
  • one enantiomer may be more active or may exhibit beneficial effects when enriched relative to the other enantiomer or when separated from the other enantiomer.
  • one skilled in the art would know how to separate, enrich, or selectively prepare the enantiomers of the compounds of the invention from this disclosure and the knowledge in the art.
  • racemic form of drug may be used, it is often less effective than administering an equal amount of enantiomerically pure drug; indeed, in some cases, one enantiomer may be pharmacologically inactive and would merely serve as a simple diluent.
  • ibuprofen had been previously administered as a racemate, it has been shown that only the S-isomer of ibuprofen is effective as an anti-inflammatory agent (in the case of ibuprofen, however, although the R-isomer is inactive, it is converted in vivo to the S-isomer, thus, the rapidity of action of the racemic form of the drug is less than that of the pure S-isomer).
  • the pharmacological activities of enantiomers may have distinct biological activity. For example, S-penicillamine is a therapeutic agent for chronic arthritis, while R-penicillamine is toxic.
  • one enantiomer is pharmacologically more active, less toxic, or has a preferred disposition in the body than the other enantiomer, it would be therapeutically more beneficial to administer that enantiomer preferentially. In this way, the patient undergoing treatment would be exposed to a lower total dose of the drug and to a lower dose of an enantiomer that is possibly toxic or an inhibitor of the other enantiomer.
  • Preparation of pure enantiomers or mixtures of desired enantiomeric excess (ee) or enantiomeric purity are accomplished by one or more of the many methods of (a) separation or resolution of enantiomers, or (b) enantioselective synthesis known to those of skill in the art, or a combination thereof.
  • These resolution methods generally rely on chiral recognition and include, for example, chromatography using chiral stationary phases, enantioselective host-guest complexation, resolution or synthesis using chiral auxiliaries, enantioselective synthesis, enzymatic and nonenzymatic kinetic resolution, or spontaneous enantioselective crystallization.
  • patient includes both human and non-human mammals.
  • effective amount means an amount of a compound according to the invention which, in the context of which it is administered or used, is sufficient to achieve the desired effect or result.
  • effective amount may include or be synonymous with a pharmaceutically effective amount or a diagnostically effective amount.
  • pharmaceutically effective amount or “therapeutically effective amount” means an amount of a compound according to the invention which, when administered to a patient in need thereof, is sufficient to effect treatment for disease-states, conditions, or disorders for which the compounds have utility. Such an amount would be sufficient to elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, or patient that is sought by a researcher or clinician.
  • the amount of a compound of according to the invention which constitutes a therapeutically effective amount will vary depending on such factors as the compound and its biological activity, the composition used for administration, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of treatment, the type of disease-state or disorder being treated and its severity, drugs used in combination with or coincidentally with the compounds of the invention, and the age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet of the patient.
  • a therapeutically effective amount can be determined routinely by one of ordinary skill in the art having regard to their own knowledge, the prior art, and this disclosure.
  • diagnostically effective amount means an amount of a compound according to the invention which, when used in a diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay, is sufficient to achieve the desired diagnostic effect or the desired biological activity necessary for the diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay. Such an amount would be sufficient to elicit the biological or medical response in a diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay, which may include a biological or medical response in a patient or in a in vitro or in vivo tissue or system, that is sought by a researcher or clinician.
  • the amount of a compound according to the invention which constitutes a diagnostically effective amount will vary depending on such factors as the compound and its biological activity, the diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay used, the composition used for administration, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of administration, drugs and other compounds used in combination with or coincidentally with the compounds of the invention, and, if a patient is the subject of the diagnostic administration, the age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet of the patient.
  • a diagnostically effective amount can be determined routinely by one of ordinary skill in the art having regard to their own knowledge, the prior art, and this disclosure.
  • modulate means the ability of a compound to alter the function of the glucocorticoid receptor by, for example, binding to and stimulating or inhibiting the glucocorticoid receptor functional responses.
  • modulator in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that modulates the glucocorticoid receptor function.
  • modulators include, but are not limited to, agonists, partial agonists, antagonists, and partial antagonists.
  • agonist in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that, when bound to the glucocorticoid receptor, enhances or increases the glucocorticoid receptor function.
  • agonists include partial agonists and full agonists.
  • full agonist in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that evokes the maximal stimulatory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even when there are spare (unoccupied) glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • partial agonist in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that is unable to evoke the maximal stimulatory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even at concentrations sufficient to saturate the glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • antagonist in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that directly or indirectly inhibits or suppresses the glucocorticoid receptor function.
  • antagonists include partial antagonists and full antagonists.
  • full antagonist in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that evokes the maximal inhibitory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even when there are spare (unoccupied) glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • partial antagonist in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that is unable to evoke the maximal inhibitory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even at concentrations sufficient to saturate the glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • treating or “treatment” mean the treatment of a disease-state in a patient, and include:
  • the invention also provides processes for making compounds of Formulas (IA) and (IB).
  • R 1 to R 7 in the formulas shall have the meaning of R 1 to R 7 in the Formula (IA) of the invention described hereinabove.
  • R 1 to R 8 in the formulas shall have the meaning of R 1 to R 8 in the Formula (IB) of the invention described hereinabove.
  • reaction conditions and reaction times may vary depending on the particular reactants used. Unless otherwise specified, solvents, temperatures, pressures, and other reaction conditions may be readily selected by one of ordinary skill in the art. Specific procedures are provided in the Synthetic Examples section. Typically, reaction progress may be monitored by thin layer chromatography (TLC), if desired, and intermediates and products may be purified by chromatography on silica gel and/or by recrystallization.
  • TLC thin layer chromatography
  • an ester intermediate of Formula (II) where R′ is Me or Et is reduced with a suitable reducing agent, such as lithium aluminum hydride, in a suitable solvent, such as THF or diethyl ether, to produce the 1,2-diol of Formula (III).
  • a suitable reducing agent such as lithium aluminum hydride
  • a suitable solvent such as THF or diethyl ether
  • Oxidative cleavage of 1,2-diols is well known in the art and may be achieved with periodic acid or lead tetraacetate, for example, in a suitable solvent, such as methanol, to provide the ketone (IV).
  • ketone (IV) Conversion of ketone (IV) to a sulfinic acid amide, such as a t-butylsulfinic acid amide, may be accomplished by reaction with a suitable Lewis acid, preferably Ti(OEt) 4 , and an alkylsulfinamide of the formula RS(O)NH 2 (wherein R is alkyl), preferably t-butylsulfinamide, to produce V.
  • a suitable Lewis acid preferably Ti(OEt) 4
  • Reaction of V with a suitable organometallic reagent R 5 R 4 M such as a Grignard reagent (M is MgBr, MgCl or MgI) or an organolithium reagent (M is Li), in a suitable solvent such as THF or diethyl ether, provides the desired compound of Formula (IA) upon hydrolysis.
  • a suitable organometallic reagent R 5 R 4 M such as a Grignard reagent (M is MgBr, MgCl or MgI) or an organolithium reagent (M is Li)
  • a suitable solvent such as THF or diethyl ether
  • Such organolithium reagents and alkylmagnesium halides or Grignard reagents are well known in the art.
  • Grignard reagents are easily prepared by the reaction of the corresponding alkyl halide with magnesium metal in a suitable solvent, such as ether or THF, under anhydrous conditions.
  • R 1 group which will undergo a Friedel-Crafts alkylation (Method B)
  • a pyruvate (VI) bearing CF 3 and where R′ is Me or Et with a bromomethyl olefin (VII) bearing an R 2 and an olefin group ( ⁇ CH—R′′) that will become R 3 , in the presence of manganese and a Lewis acid such as zinc chloride in a suitable solvent such as THF to produce a 2-hydroxy ester (VIII).
  • Method C one may perform a Grignard reaction with a pyruvate bearing CF 3 (VI) and an ethyl magnesium halide (IX) bearing R 1 , R 2 , and R 3 to provide the desired intermediate (II).
  • trifluoroacetic anhydride (X) and N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (XI) are coupled under basic conditions, e.g., in the presence of a suitable base, to afford trifluoroacetamide (XII) (Weinreb amide).
  • XII trifluoroacetamide
  • the Weinreb amide (XII) is reacted with a vinyl magnesium bromide bearing R 2 and R 3 in a suitable solvent to afford the trifluoromethylenone intermediate (XIII).
  • This trifluoromethylenone intermediate is treated with an organocopper reagent R 1 Cu (not shown), derived in-situ from a Grignard or organolithium reagent R 1 -M (where M is Li or MgX where X is halogen) by treating with a copper salt CuX (where X is halogen), in a suitable solvent to afford the 1,4-addition product IV.
  • R 1 Cu organocopper reagent
  • R 1 Cu derived in-situ from a Grignard or organolithium reagent R 1 -M (where M is Li or MgX where X is halogen)
  • a copper salt CuX where X is halogen
  • a substituted phenol (XIV) is reacted with an acryloyl chloride bearing R 2 and R 3 (XV) in the presence of a suitable base such as triethylamine to provide an intermediate ester (not shown) which is cyclized in-situ by treatment with a Lewis acid, such as aluminum trichloride, in a suitable solvent such as carbon disulfide to provide lactone (XVI).
  • a suitable amine HNR′′R′′′ such as morpholine, such that in the resulting amide (XVII), —NR′′R′′′ will function as a leaving group in the subsequent reaction.
  • the intermediate phenol that forms (not shown) is protected, for example, by reaction in-situ with an alkyl halide RX (where R is alkyl and X is halogen), such as methyl iodide, in the presence of a suitable base such as potassium hydroxide to form the protected phenol in which the protecting group is an alkoxy group as shown in (XVII).
  • RX alkyl halide
  • a suitable base such as potassium hydroxide
  • the amide (XVII) is then reacted with an organometallic reagent (R 8 M), such as a Grignard reagent (M is MgBr or MgCl) or an organolithium reagent (M is Li), in a suitable solvent such as THF or diethyl ether to provide ketone (XVIII).
  • the unsubstituted-amino compounds of Formulas (IA) and (IB) may be N-alkylated using conventional techniques to prepare the corresponding N-alkylated compounds.
  • the nitrogen of compounds of Formula (IA) and (IB) undergoes reductive amination with aldehydes in suitable solvents, such as acetonitrile or 1,2-dichloroethane, and in the presence of suitable reducing agents, such as sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to give the corresponding tri- or di-substituted amine compound, respectively.
  • suitable solvents such as acetonitrile or 1,2-dichloroethane
  • suitable reducing agents such as sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride
  • the unsubstituted-amino compounds of Formula (IA) and (IB) may be N-acylated using conventional techniques to prepare the corresponding N-acylated compounds.
  • compounds of Formula (IA) and (IB) undergo acylation with desired acid anhydrides upon heating in a suitable solvent, such as 1,2-dichloroethane, to give the corresponding N-mono-acylated product.
  • a suitable solvent such as 1,2-dichloroethane
  • Other known techniques may be used to prepare other substituted-amino derivatives of the compounds of Formulae (IA) and (IB) from the corresponding unsubstituted-amino compounds.
  • This intermediate may then be used as described in Example 1 and Scheme I of the General Synthetic Methods section to produce compounds of the invention.
  • This intermediate may then be used as described in Example 1 and Scheme III of the General Synthetic Methods section to produce compounds of the invention.
  • glucocorticoid receptor (GR) complex used in the assay is described in Goldrick et al., U.S. provisional application No. 60/291,877, filed May 18, 2001 (corresponding to Goldrick et al., U.S. nonprovisional application Ser. No. 10/151,133, filed May 20, 2002, Attny. Docket No. 9/205) both incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
  • TAMRA tetramethyl rhodamine
  • the wavelengths for maximum excitation and emission of the fluorescent probe should first be measured.
  • An example of such a probe is rhodamine (TAMRA)-labeled dexamethasone.
  • the affinity of the probe for the steroid receptor was then determined in a titration experiment.
  • the fluorescence polarization value of the probe in assay buffer was measured on an SLM-8100 fluorometer using the excitation and emission maximum values described above. Aliquots of expression vector lysate were added and fluorescence polarization was measured after each addition until no further change in polarization value was observed. Non-linear least squares regression analysis was used to calculate the dissociation constant of the probe from the polarization values obtained for lysate binding to the probe.
  • This assay uses fluorescence polarization (FP) to quantitate the ability of test compounds to compete with tetramethyl rhodamine (TAMRA)-labeled dexamethasone for binding to a human glucocorticoid receptor (GR) complex prepared from an insect expression system.
  • the assay buffer was: 10 mM TES, 50 mM KCl, 20 mM Na 2 MoO 4 .2H 2 O, 1.5 mM EDTA, 0.04% w/v CHAPS, 10% v/v glycerol, 1 mM dithiothreitol, pH 7.4.
  • Test compounds were dissolved to 1 mM in neat DMSO and then further diluted to 10 ⁇ assay concentration in assay buffer supplemented with 10% v/v DMSO. Test compounds were serially diluted at 10 ⁇ assay concentrations in 10% DMSO-containing buffer in 96-well polypropylene plates. Binding reaction mixtures were prepared in 96-well black Dynex microtiter plates by sequential addition of the following assay components to each well: 15 ⁇ L of 10 ⁇ test compound solution, 85 ⁇ L of GR-containing baculovirus lysate diluted 1:170 in assay buffer, and 50 ⁇ L of 15 nM TAMRA-labeled dexamethasone.
  • Positive controls were reaction mixtures containing no test compound; negative controls (blanks) were reaction mixtures containing 0.7 ⁇ M to 2 ⁇ M dexamethasone.
  • the binding reactions were incubated for 1 hour at room temperature and then read for fluorescence polarization in the LJL Analyst set to 550 nm excitation and 580 nm emission, with the Rhodamine 561 dichroic mirror installed.
  • IC 50 values were determined by iterative non-linear curve fitting of the FP signal data to a 4-parameter logistic equation.
  • PR progesterone receptor
  • ER estrogen receptor
  • mineralocorticoid receptors to evaluate the compound's selectivity for GR.
  • PR insect cell lysate is diluted 1:7.1 and MR lysate diluted 1:9.4.
  • PR probe is TAMRA-labeled mifepristone, used at a final concentration of 5 nM in the assay, and the negative controls (blanks) were reactions containing mifepristone at 0.7 ⁇ M to 2 ⁇ M.
  • the ER protocol is similar to the above protocols, but uses PanVera kit receptor, fluorescein-labeled probe.
  • the assay components are made in the same volumes as above, to produce final assay concentrations for ER of 15 nM and ES2 probe of 1 nM.
  • the component order of addition is modified from the above assays: probe is added to the plate first, followed by receptor and test compound.
  • the plates are read in the LJL Analyst set to 485 nm excitation and 530 nm emission, with the Fluorescein 505 dichroic mirror installed.
  • Compounds found to bind to the glucocorticoid receptor may be evaluated for dissociation of transactivation and transrepression by assays cited in the Background of the Invention (C. M. Bamberger and H. M. Schulte, Eur. J. Clin. Invest., 2000, 30 (suppl. 3) 6-9) or by the assays described below.
  • Dexamethasone a synthetic ligand to the glucocorticoid receptor (GR) induces expression of aromatase in human foreskin fibroblast cells.
  • the activity of aromatase is measured by the conversion of testosterone to estradiol in culture media.
  • Compounds that exhibit binding to GR are evaluated for their ability to induce aromatase activity in human foreskin fibroblasts.
  • Human foreskin fibroblast cells (ATCC Cat. No. CRL-2429, designation CCD112SK) are plated on 96 well plates at 50,000 cells per well 5 days before use, in Iscove's Modified Dulbecco's Media (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat No. 12440-053) supplemented with 10% charcoal filtered FBS (Clonetech Cat No. SH30068) and Gentamycin (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat. No. 15710-064). On the day of the experiment, the media in the wells is replaced with fresh media. Cells are treated with test compounds to final concentrations of 10 ⁇ 5 M to 10 ⁇ 8 M, and testosterone to a final concentration of 300 ng/mL.
  • Control wells include: (a) wells that receive testosterone only, and) wells that receive testosterone plus 2 ⁇ M of dexamethasone to provide maximum induction of aromatase. Plates are incubated at 37° C. overnight (15 to 18 hours), and supernatants are harvested at the end of incubation. Estradiol in the supernatant is measured using ELISA kits for estradiol (made by ALPCO, obtained from American Laboratory Products Cat. No. 020-DR-2693) according to the manufacture's instruction. The amount of estradiol is inversely proportional to the ELISA signals in each well. The extent of aromatase induction by test compounds is expressed as a relative percentage to dexamethasone. EC 50 values of test compounds are derived by non-linear curve fitting.
  • Human foreskin fibroblast cells produce IL-6 in response to stimulation by proinflammatory cytokine IL-1.
  • This inflammatory response as measured by the production of IL-6, can be effectively inhibited by dexamethasone, a synthetic ligand to the glucocorticoid receptor (GR).
  • GR glucocorticoid receptor
  • Human foreskin fibroblast cells (ATCC Cat. No. CRL-2429) are plated on 96 well plates at 5,000 cells per well the day before use, in Iscove's Modified Dulbecco's Media (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat. No. 12440-053) supplemented with 10% charcoal filtered FBS (Clonetech Cat. No. SH30068) and Gentamycin (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat. No. 15710-064). On the next day, media in the wells is replaced with fresh media. Cells are treated with IL-1 (rhIL-1 ⁇ , R&D Systems Cat. No.
  • test compounds 200-LA to a final concentration of 1 ng/mL, and with test compounds to final concentrations of 10 ⁇ 5 M to 10 ⁇ 8 M, in a total volume of 200 ⁇ L per well.
  • Samples are done in duplicates. Background control wells do not receive test compounds or IL-1. Positive control wells receive IL-1 only and represent maximum (or 100%) amount of IL-6 production. Plates are incubated at 37° C. overnight (15 to 18 hours), and supernatants are harvested at the end of incubation. IL-6 levels in the supernatants are determined by the ELISA kits for IL-6 (MedSystems Diagnostics GmbH, Vienna, Austria, Cat. No. BMS213TEN) according to manufacture's instructions. The extent of inhibition of IL-6 by test compounds is expressed in percentage relative to positive controls. IC 50 values of test compounds are derived by non-linear curve fitting.
  • Evaluation of agonist or antagonist activity of compounds binding to the glucocorticoid receptor may be determined by any of the assays.
  • TAT Tyrosine Aminotransferase
  • H4-II-E-C3 cells were incubated overnight in 96 well plates (20,000 cells/100 ⁇ L/well) in MEM medium containing 10% heat inactivated FBS and 1% nonessential amino acids. On the next day, cells were stimulated with the indicated concentrations of dexamethasone or test compound (dissolved in DMSO, final DMSO concentration 0.2%) for 18 hours. Control cells were treated with 0.2% DMSO. After 18 hours, the cells were lysed in a buffer containing 0.1% Triton X-100 and the TAT activity was measured in a photometric assay using tyrosine and alpha-ketoglutarate as substrates.
  • TAT tyrosine aminotransferase
  • the hepatoma cells were pre-stimulated by addition of dexamethasone (concentration ranges from 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells.
  • dexamethasone concentration ranges from 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M
  • the steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • HeLa cells were stably co-transfected with the pHHLuc-plasmid containing a fragment of the MMTV-LTR ( ⁇ 200 to +100 relative to the transcription start site) cloned in front of the luciferase gene (Norden, 1988) and the pcDNA3.1 plasmid (Invitrogen) constitutively expressing the resistance for the selective antibiotic GENETICIN®. Clones with best induction of the MMTV-promoter were selected and used for further experiments.
  • the MMTV-promoter was pre-stimulated by adding dexamethasone (3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells.
  • dexamethasone 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M
  • the steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • U-937 cells were incubated for 2 to 4 days in RPMI1640 medium containing 10% CCS (charcoal treated calf serum). The cells were transferred to 96 well plates (40,000 cells/100 ⁇ L/well) and stimulated with 1 ⁇ g/mL LPS (dissolved in PBS) in the presence or absence of dexamethasone or test compound (dissolved in DMSO, final concentration 0.2%). Control cells were treated with 0.2% DMSO. After 18 hours, the IL-8 concentration in the cell supernatant was measured by ELISA, using the “OptEIA human IL-8 set” (Pharmingen, Cat. No. 2654KI).
  • the LPS-induced IL-8 secretion was inhibited by adding dexamethasone (3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells.
  • dexamethasone 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M
  • the steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • HeLa cells were stably co-transfected with a plasmid containing a 1.3 kb fragment of the human ICAM-promoter ( ⁇ 1353 to ⁇ 9 relative to the transcription start site, Ledebur and Parks, 1995) cloned in front of the luciferase gene and the pcDNA3.1 plasmid (Invitrogen) which constitutively expresses the resistance for the antibiotic GENETICIN®. Clones with best induction of the ICAM-promoter were selected and used for further experiments. Cells were transferred to 96 well plates (15,000 cells/100 ⁇ L/well) in DMEM medium supplemented with 3% CCS.
  • the activation of the ICAM-promoter was induced by addition of 10 ng/mL recombinant TNF-alpha (R&D System, Cat. No. 210-TA). Simultaneously the cells were treated with the test compound or dexamethasone (dissolved in DMSO, final concentration 0.2%). Control cells were treated with DMSO only. After 18 hours, the cells were lysed with cell lysis reagent (Promega, Cat. No. E1531), luciferase assay reagent (Promega, Cat. No. E1501) was added and glow luminescence was measured using a luminometer (BMG, Offenburg).
  • the TNF-alpha-induced activation of the ICAM-promoter was inhibited by adding dexamethasone (3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells.
  • dexamethasone 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 9 M to 3 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 8 M
  • the steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • the preferred potency range in the above assays is between 0.1 nM and 10 ⁇ M, the more preferred potency range is 0.1 nM to 1 ⁇ M, and the most preferred potency range is 0.1 nM to 100 nM.
  • Representative compounds of the invention have been tested and have shown activity as modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor function in one or more of the above assays.
  • the following compounds of Formula (IA) have demonstrated activity in the GR binding assay:
  • the invention also provides methods of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient comprising administering to the patient a compound according to the invention. If the purpose of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient is to treat a disease-state or condition, the administration preferably comprises a therapeutically or pharmaceutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention.
  • the administration preferably comprises an effective amount of a compound according to the invention, that is, the amount necessary to obtain the desired effect or degree of modulation.
  • the compounds of the invention are useful in modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function. In doing so, these compounds have therapeutic use in treating disease-states and conditions mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function or that would benefit from modulation of the glucocorticoid receptor function.
  • the compounds of the invention modulate the glucocorticoid receptor function, they have very useful anti-inflammatory and antiallergic, immune-suppressive, and anti-proliferative activity and they can be used in patients as drugs, particularly in the form of pharmaceutical compositions as set forth below, for the treatment of disease-states and conditions.
  • the agonist compounds according to the invention can be used in patients as drugs for the treatment of the following disease-states or indications that are accompanied by inflammatory, allergic, and/or proliferative processes:
  • the compounds according to the invention can be used for the treatment of any other disease-states or conditions not mentioned above which have been treated, are treated, or will be treated with synthetic glucocorticoids (see, e.g., H. J. Hatz, Glucocorticoide: Immunologische Grundlagen, Pharmakologie und Therapierichtlinien [Glucocorticoids: Immunological Fundamentals, Pharmacology, and Therapeutic Guidelines], Stuttgart: Verlagsgesellschaft mbH, 1998, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety). Most or all of the indications (i) through (xx) mentioned above are described in detail in H. J. Hatz, Glucocorticoide: Immunologische Grundlagen, Pharmakologie und Therapierichtlinien . Furthermore, the compounds of the invention can also be used to treat disorders other than those listed above or mentioned or discussed herein, including in the Background of the Invention.
  • the antagonist compounds according to the invention can be used in patients as drugs for the treatment of the following disease-states or indications, without limitation: type II diabetes (non-insulin-dependent diabetes); obesity; cardiovascular diseases; hypertension; arteriosclerosis; neurological diseases, such as psychosis and depression; adrenal and pituitary tumors; glaucoma; and Cushing syndrome based on an ACTH-secreting tumor like pituitary adenoma.
  • type II diabetes non-insulin-dependent diabetes
  • obesity cardiovascular diseases
  • hypertension arteriosclerosis
  • neurological diseases such as psychosis and depression
  • adrenal and pituitary tumors glaucoma
  • Cushing syndrome based on an ACTH-secreting tumor like pituitary adenoma.
  • the compounds of the invention are useful for treating obesity and all disease-states and indications related to a deregulated fatty acids metabolism such as hypertension, atherosclerosis, and other cardiovascular diseases.
  • the antagonist compounds of the invention are useful in treating all disease-states and conditions that involve increased carbohydrate, protein, and lipid metabolism and would include disease-states and conditions leading to catabolism like muscle frailty (as an example of protein metabolism).
  • the compounds of the invention may also be used in diagnostic applications and for commercial and other purposes as standards in competitive binding assays.
  • the compounds of the invention may be used in the form of the compounds themselves or they may be modified by attaching a radioisotope, luminescence, fluorescent label or the like in order to obtain a radioisotope, luminescence, or fluorescent probe, as would be known by one of skill in the art and as outlined in Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals, 6th Edition, R. P. Haugland (ed.), Eugene: Molecular Probes, 1996 ; Fluorescence and Luminescence Probes for Biological Activity , W. T.
  • the compounds of the invention are typically administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition.
  • Such compositions can be prepared using procedures well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one compound of the invention.
  • the compounds of the invention may also be administered alone or in combination with adjuvants that enhance stability of the compounds of the invention, facilitate administration of pharmaceutical compositions containing them in certain embodiments, provide increased dissolution or dispersion, increased inhibitory activity, provide adjunct therapy, and the like.
  • the compounds according to the invention may be used on their own or in conjunction with other active substances according to the invention, optionally also in conjunction with other pharmacologically active substances.
  • the compounds of this invention are administered in a therapeutically or pharmaceutically effective amount, but may be administered in lower amounts for diagnostic or other purposes.
  • the compounds of the invention are useful in combination with glucocorticoids or corticosteroids.
  • standard therapy for a variety of immune and inflammatory disorders includes administration of corticosteroids, which have the ability to suppress immunologic and inflammatory responses.
  • corticosteroids While therapeutically beneficial, however, the use of corticosteroids is associated with a number of side effects, ranging from mild to possibly life threatening, especially with prolonged and/or high dose steroid usage. Accordingly, methods and compositions that enable the use of a lower effective dosage of corticosteroids (referred to as the “steroid sparing effect”) would be highly desirable to avoid unwanted side effects.
  • the compounds of the invention provide such a steroid sparing effect by achieving the desired therapeutic effect while allowing the use of lower doses and less frequent administration of glucocorticoids or corticosteroids.
  • Administration of the compounds of the invention, in pure form or in an appropriate pharmaceutical composition can be carried out using any of the accepted modes of administration of pharmaceutical compositions.
  • administration can be, for example, orally, buccally (e.g., sublingually), nasally, parenterally, topically, transdermally, vaginally, or rectally, in the form of solid, semi-solid, lyophilized powder, or liquid dosage forms, such as, for example, tablets, suppositories, pills, soft elastic and hard gelatin capsules, powders, solutions, suspensions, or aerosols, or the like, preferably in unit dosage forms suitable for simple administration of precise dosages.
  • the pharmaceutical compositions will generally include a conventional pharmaceutical carrier or excipient and a compound of the invention as the/an active agent, and, in addition, may include other medicinal agents, pharmaceutical agents, carriers, adjuvants, diluents, vehicles, or combinations thereof.
  • Such pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, or additives as well as methods of making pharmaceutical compositions for various modes or administration are well-known to those of skill in the art. The state of the art is evidenced, e.g., by Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, A.
  • the forms of the compounds of the invention utilized in a particular pharmaceutical formulation will be selected (e.g., salts) that possess suitable physical characteristics (e.g., water solubility) that is required for the formulation to be efficacious.
  • compositions suitable for buccal (sub-lingual) administration include lozenges comprising a compound of the present invention in a flavored base, usually sucrose, and acacia or tragacanth, and pastilles comprising the compound in an inert base such as gelatin and glycerin or sucrose and acacia.
  • compositions suitable for parenteral administration comprise sterile aqueous preparations of a compound of the present invention. These preparations are preferably administered intravenously, although administration can also be effected by means of subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intradermal injection.
  • injectable pharmaceutical formulations are commonly based upon injectable sterile saline, phosphate-buffered saline, oleaginous suspensions, or other injectable carriers known in the art and are generally rendered sterile and isotonic with the blood.
  • the injectable pharmaceutical formulations may therefore be provided as a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, including 1,3-butanediol, water, Ringer's solution, isotonic sodium chloride solution, fixed oils such as synthetic mono- or diglycerides, fatty acids such as oleic acid, and the like.
  • a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent including 1,3-butanediol, water, Ringer's solution, isotonic sodium chloride solution, fixed oils such as synthetic mono- or diglycerides, fatty acids such as oleic acid, and the like.
  • injectable pharmaceutical formulations are formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or setting agents and suspending agents.
  • Injectable compositions will generally contain from 0.1 to 5% w/w of a compound of the invention.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules.
  • a pharmaceutically acceptable composition containing a compound(s) of the invention is formed by the incorporation of any of the normally employed excipients, such as, for example, pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, pregelatinized starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, talcum, cellulose ether derivatives, glucose, gelatin, sucrose, citrate, propyl gallate, and the like.
  • Such solid pharmaceutical formulations may include formulations, as are well known in the art, to provide prolonged or sustained delivery of the drug to the gastrointestinal tract by any number of mechanisms, which include, but are not limited to, pH sensitive release from the dosage form based on the changing pH of the small intestine, slow erosion of a tablet or capsule, retention in the stomach based on the physical properties of the formulation, bioadhesion of the dosage form to the mucosal lining of the intestinal tract, or enzymatic release of the active drug from the dosage form.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds include emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs, optionally containing pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, ethanol and the like. These compositions can also contain additional adjuvants such as wetting, emulsifying, suspending, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
  • a carrier such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, ethanol and the like.
  • additional adjuvants such as wetting, emulsifying, suspending, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
  • Topical dosage forms of the compounds include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants, eye ointments, eye or ear drops, impregnated dressings and aerosols, and may contain appropriate conventional additives such as preservatives, solvents to assist drug penetration and emollients in ointments and creams. Topical application may be once or more than once per day depending upon the usual medical considerations.
  • preferred compounds for the present invention can be administered in intranasal form via topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles.
  • the formulations may also contain compatible conventional carriers, such as cream or ointment bases and ethanol or oleyl alcohol for lotions. Such carriers may be present as from about 1% up to about 98% of the formulation, more usually they will form up to about 80% of the formulation.
  • Transdermal administration is also possible.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for transdermal administration can be presented as discrete patches adapted to remain in intimate contact with the epidermis of the recipient for a prolonged period of time.
  • the dosage administration will, of course, be continuous rather than intermittent throughout the dosage regimen.
  • patches suitably contain a compound of the invention in an optionally buffered, aqueous solution, dissolved and/or dispersed in an adhesive, or dispersed in a polymer.
  • a suitable concentration of the active compound is about 1% to 35%, preferably about 3% to 15%.
  • the compounds of the invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from a pump spray device not requiring a propellant gas or from a pressurized pack or a nebulizer with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, tetrafluoroethane, heptafluoropropane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gas.
  • a suitable propellant e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, tetrafluoroethane, heptafluoropropane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gas.
  • the aerosol spray dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount so that the resulting metered dose inhaler (MDI) is used to administer the compounds of the invention in
  • Such inhaler, nebulizer, or atomizer devices are known in the art, for example, in PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/12687 (particularly FIG. 6 thereof, which is the basis for the commercial RESPIMAT® nebulizer); WO 94/07607; WO 97/12683; and WO 97/20590, to which reference is hereby made and each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • Rectal administration can be effected utilizing unit dose suppositories in which the compound is admixed with low-melting water-soluble or insoluble solids such as fats, cocoa butter, glycerinated gelatin, hydrogenated vegetable oils, mixtures of polyethylene glycols of various molecular weights, or fatty acid esters of polyethylene glycols, or the like.
  • the active compound is usually a minor component, often from about 0.05 to 10% by weight, with the remainder being the base component.
  • the compounds of the invention are formulated with an acceptable carrier or excipient.
  • the carriers or excipients used must, of course, be acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the composition and must not be deleterious to the patient.
  • the carrier or excipient can be a solid or a liquid, or both, and is preferably formulated with the compound of the invention as a unit-dose composition, for example, a tablet, which can contain from 0.05% to 95% by weight of the active compound.
  • Such carriers or excipients include inert fillers or diluents, binders, lubricants, disintegrating agents, solution retardants, resorption accelerators, absorption agents, and coloring agents.
  • Suitable binders include starch, gelatin, natural sugars such as glucose or ⁇ -lactose, corn sweeteners, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, tragacanth or sodium alginate, carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol, waxes, and the like.
  • Lubricants include sodium oleate, sodium stearate, magnesium stearate, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, and the like.
  • Disintegrators include starch, methyl cellulose, agar, bentonite, xanthan gum, and the like.
  • a therapeutically effective daily dose is from about 0.001 mg to about 15 mg/kg of body weight per day of a compound of the invention; preferably, from about 0.1 mg to about 10 mg/kg of body weight per day; and most preferably, from about 0.1 mg to about 1.5 mg/kg of body weight per day.
  • the dosage range would be from about 0.07 mg to about 1050 mg per day of a compound of the invention, preferably from about 7.0 mg to about 700 mg per day, and most preferably from about 7.0 mg to about 105 mg per day.
  • compositions encompass all the foregoing additives and the like.
  • the active substance, corn starch, lactose, and polyvinylpyrrolidone are thoroughly mixed and moistened with water.
  • the moist mass is pushed through a screen with a 1 mm mesh size, dried at about 45° C. and the granules are then passed through the same screen.
  • convex tablet cores with a diameter of 6 mm are compressed in a tablet-making machine.
  • the tablet cores thus produced are coated in known manner with a covering consisting essentially of sugar and talc.
  • the finished coated tablets are polished with wax.
  • the substance and corn starch are mixed and moistened with water.
  • the moist mass is screened and dried.
  • the dry granules are screened and mixed with magnesium stearate.
  • the finished mixture is packed into size 1 hard gelatine capsules.
  • the active substance is dissolved in water at its own pH or optionally at pH 5.5 to 6.5 and sodium chloride is added to make it isotonic.
  • the solution obtained is filtered free from pyrogens and the filtrate is transferred under aseptic conditions into ampoules which are then sterilized and sealed by fusion.
  • the ampoules contain 5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg of active substance.
  • the suspension is transferred into a conventional aerosol container with a metering valve. Preferably, 50 ⁇ L of suspension are delivered per spray.
  • the active substance may also be metered in higher doses if desired (e.g., 0.02% by weight).
  • Component Amount H. POWDER FOR INHALATION active substance 1.0 mg lactose monohydrate to 25 mg I. POWDER FOR INHALATION active substance 2.0 mg lactose monohydrate to 25 mg J. POWDER FOR INHALATION active substance 1.0 mg lactose monohydrate to 5 mg K. POWDER FOR INHALATION active substance 2.0 mg lactose monohydrate to 5 mg

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Organic Chemistry (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Bioinformatics & Cheminformatics (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • General Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
  • Pharmacology & Pharmacy (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Cardiology (AREA)
  • Diabetes (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Immunology (AREA)
  • Neurosurgery (AREA)
  • Neurology (AREA)
  • Physical Education & Sports Medicine (AREA)
  • Hematology (AREA)
  • Rheumatology (AREA)
  • Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
  • Ophthalmology & Optometry (AREA)
  • Pulmonology (AREA)
  • Hospice & Palliative Care (AREA)
  • Obesity (AREA)
  • Dermatology (AREA)
  • Endocrinology (AREA)
  • Orthopedic Medicine & Surgery (AREA)
  • Pain & Pain Management (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Gastroenterology & Hepatology (AREA)
  • Child & Adolescent Psychology (AREA)
  • Psychiatry (AREA)
  • Emergency Medicine (AREA)
  • Pharmaceuticals Containing Other Organic And Inorganic Compounds (AREA)

Abstract

A compound of Formula (IA) or Formula (IB)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00001
wherein R1, R2, R3, R4, R5, R6, R7 and R8 are as defined herein, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; pharmaceutical compositions containing such compounds, and methods of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function and methods of treating disease-states or conditions mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function or characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes in a patient using these compounds.

Description

  • This application is a divisional of U.S. application Ser. No. 10/446,355 filed May 28, 2003, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/386,334, filed on Jun. 6, 2002, which applications are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety.
    • FIELD OF THE INVENTION
  • The present invention relates to glucocorticoid mimetics or ligands, methods of making such compounds, their use in pharmaceutical compositions, and their use in modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function, treating disease-states or conditions mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, and other uses.
    • BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
  • Glucocorticoids, a class of corticosteroids, are endogenous hormones with profound effects on the immune system and multiple organ systems. They suppress a variety of immune and inflammatory functions by inhibition of inflammatory cytokines such as IL-1, IL-2, IL-6, and TNF, inhibition of arachidonic acid metabolites including prostaglandins and leukotrienes, depletion of T-lymphocytes, and reduction of the expression of adhesion molecules on endothelial cells (P. J. Barnes, Clin. Sci., 1998, 94, pp. 557-572; P. J. Barnes et al., Trends Pharmacol. Sci., 1993, 14, pp. 436-441). In addition to these effects, glucocorticoids stimulate glucose production in the liver and catabolism of proteins, play a role in electrolyte and water balance, reduce calcium absorption, and inhibit osteoblast function.
  • The anti-inflammatory and immune suppressive activities of endogenous glucocorticoids have stimulated the development of synthetic glucocorticoid derivatives including dexamethasone, prednisone, and prednisolone (L. Parente, Glucocorticoids, N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, pp. 35-54). These have found wide use in the treatment of inflammatory, immune, and allergic disorders including rheumatic diseases such as rheumatoid arthritis, juvenile arthritis, and ankylosing spondylitis, dermatological diseases including psoriasis and pemphigus, allergic disorders including allergic rhinitis, atopic dermatitis, and contact dermatitis, pulmonary conditions including asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), and other immune and inflammatory diseases including Crohn disease, ulcerative colitis, systemic lupus erythematosus, autoimmune chronic active hepatitis, osteoarthritis, tendonitis, and bursitis (J. Toogood, Glucocorticoids, N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, pp. 161-174). They have also been used to help prevent rejection in organ transplantation.
  • Unfortunately, in addition to the desired therapeutic effects of glucocorticoids, their use is associated with a number of adverse side-effects, some of which can be severe and life-threatening. These include alterations in fluid and electrolyte balance, edema, weight gain, hypertension, muscle weakness, development or aggravation of diabetes mellitus, and osteoporosis. Therefore, a compound that exhibited a reduced side effect profile while maintaining the potent anti-inflammatory effects would be particularly desirable especially when treating a chronic disease.
  • The effects of glucocorticoids are mediated at the cellular level by the glucocorticoid receptor (R. H. Oakley and J. Cidlowski, Glucocorticoids, N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, pp. 55-80). The glucocorticoid receptor is a member of a class of structurally related intracellular receptors that when coupled with a ligand can function as a transcription factor that affects gene expression (R. M. Evans, Science, 1988, 240, pp. 889-895). Other members of the family of steroid receptors include the mineralocorticoid, progesterone, estrogen, and androgen receptors. In addition to the effects mentioned above for glucocorticoids, hormones that act on this receptor family have a profound influence on body homeostasis, mineral metabolism, the stress response, and development of sexual characteristics. Glucocorticoids, N. J. Goulding and R. J. Flowers (eds.), Boston: Birkhauser, 2001, is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety to better describe the state of the art.
  • A molecular mechanism which accounts for the beneficial anti-inflammatory effects and the undesired side effects has been proposed (e.g., S. Heck et al., EMBO J, 1994, 17, pp. 4087-4095; H. M. Reichardt et al., Cell, 1998, 93, pp. 531-541; F. Tronche et al., Curr. Opin. in Genetics and Dev., 1998, 8, pp. 532-538). Many of the metabolic and cardiovascular side effects are thought to be the result of a process called transactivation.
  • In transactivation, the translocation of the ligand-bound glucocorticoid receptor to the nucleus is followed by binding to glucocorticoid response elements (GREs) in the promoter region of side-effect associated genes, for example phosphoenolpyruvate carboxy kinase (PEPCK) in the case of increased glucose production. The result is an increased transcription rate of these genes which is believed to result, ultimately, in the observed side effects. The anti-inflammatory effects are thought to be due to a process called transrepression. In general, transrepression is a process independent of DNA binding that results from inhibition of NF-kB and AP-1-mediated pathways, leading to down regulation of many inflammatory and immune mediators. Additionally, it is believed that a number of the observed side effects may be due to the cross-reactivity of the currently available glucocorticoids with other steroid receptors, particularly the mineralocorticoid and progesterone receptors.
  • Thus it may be possible to discover ligands for the glucocorticoid receptor that are highly selective and, upon binding, can dissociate the transactivation and transrepression pathways, providing therapeutic agents with a reduced side effect profile. Assay systems to determine effects on transactivation and transrepression have been described (e.g., C. M. Bamberger and H. M. Schulte, Eur. J. Clin. Invest., 2000, 30 (suppl. 3), pp. 6-9). Selectivity for the glucocorticoid receptor may be determined by comparing the binding affinity for this receptor with that of other steroid family receptors including those mentioned above.
  • Glucocorticoids also stimulate the production of glucose in the liver by a process called gluconeogenesis (J. E. Freidman et al, J. Biol. Chem., 1997, 272, 31475-31481) and it is believed that this process is mediated by transactivation events. Increased glucose production can exacerbate type II diabetes therefore a compound that selectivity inhibited glucocorticoid mediated glucose production may have therapeutic utility in this indication.
  • Novel ligands for the glucocorticoid receptor have been described in the scientific and patent literature. For example, PCT International Publication No. WO 99/33786 discloses triphenylpropanamide compounds with potential use in treating inflammatory diseases. PCT International Publication No. WO 00/66522 describes non-steroidal compounds as selective modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor potentially useful in treating metabolic and inflammatory diseases. PCT International Publication No. WO 99/41256 describes tetracyclic modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor potentially useful in treating immune, autoimmune, and inflammatory diseases. U.S. Pat. No. 5,688,810 describes various non-steroidal compounds as modulators of glucocorticoid and other steroid receptors. PCT International Publication No. WO 99/63976 describes a non-steroidal, liver-selective glucocorticoid antagonist potentially useful in the treatment of diabetes. PCT International Publication No. WO 00/32584 discloses non-steroidal compounds having anti-inflammatory activity with dissociation between anti-inflammatory and metabolic effects. PCT International Publication No. WO 98/54159 describes non-steroidal cyclically substituted acylanilides with mixed gestagen and androgen activity. U.S. Pat. No. 4,880,839 describes acylanilides having progestational activity and EP 253503 discloses acylanilides with antiandrogenic properties. PCT International Publication No. WO 97/27852 describes amides that are inhibitors of farnesyl-protein transferase.
  • A compound that is found to interact with the glucocorticoid receptor in a binding assay could be an agonist or an antagonist. The agonist properties of the compound could be evaluated in the transactivation or transrepression assays described above. Given the efficacy demonstrated by available glucocorticoid drugs in inflammatory and immune diseases and their adverse side effects, there remains a need for novel glucocorticoid receptor agonists with selectivity over other members of the steroid receptor family and a dissociation of the transactivation and transrepression activities. Alternatively the compound may be found to have antagonist activity. As mentioned above, glucocorticoids stimulate glucose production in the liver. Increased glucose production induced by glucocorticoid excess can exacerbate existing diabetes, or trigger latent diabetes. Thus a ligand for the glucocorticoid receptor that is found to be an antagonist may be useful for treating or preventing diabetes.
    • SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
  • In a first general aspect, the instant invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA)
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00002
    wherein:
    • R1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl or aryl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano or amino;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
    • R4 is C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, or C2-C5 alkynyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, amino, or oxo; and
    • R5 is a heteroaryl group optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
        • wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 alkoxy, C2-8 alkenyloxy, C2-8 alkynyloxy, hydroxy, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
        or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention includes compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, indenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl, chromanyl, dihydroindolyl, indolyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzothienyl, benzodioxolanyl, dihydrobenzoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzpyrazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, dihydroquinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyrazinyl each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, or amino;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C6 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
    • R4 is C1-C3 alkyl or C2-C3 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently methyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or oxo; and
    • R5 is an imidazolyl, pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, diazaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, furanopyrimidinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, benzoxazolyl, oxazolopyridinyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolopyridinyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazolopyridinyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, phenyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C3 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C3 dialkylaminocarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
        • wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, oxo, or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, C1-5 alkoxy, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, phenoxy, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, oxo or trifluoromethyl;
        or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R1 is thienyl, phenyl, naphthyl, pyridinyl, chromanyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one or two substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, oxo or cyano;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a spiro cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl ring;
    • R4 is C1-C3 alkyl; and
    • R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, phenyl, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, morpholinylcarbonyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, benzyl, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl or oxo;
        or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl or pyridinyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, trifuoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, cyano or hydroxy;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
    • R4 is CH2; and
    • R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl, acetyl, formyl, methylsulfonyl or hydroxy,
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R1 is a pyridinyl, is a phenyl substituted with a fluoro, is a phenyl substituted with a methoxy group and a fluoro, is a phenyl substituted with a hydroxy group and a fluoro, is a benzofuranyl group, is a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or is a dihydrobenzofuranyl group substituted with a cyano group,
    • R2 and R3 are each independently methyl;
    • R4 is CH2; and
    • R5 is a quinolinyl, azaindolyl, pyridinyl, benzimidazolyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl or cyano,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl, acetyl, formyl, methylsulfonyl or hydroxy,
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo or hydroxy;
        or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R4 is CH2.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, quinolinyl or azaindolyl each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro or cyano,
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IA) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C2-C3 alkynyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone; and
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl,
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • The following are representative compounds according to Formula (IA) of the invention:
    Comp. No. Compound Name Compound Structure
    1 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1- (pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00003
    2 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2- ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00004
    3 1-(2,6-Dichloro-pyridin-4- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-trifluoromethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00005
    4 1-(4,6-Dimethyl-pyridin-2- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-trifluoromethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00006
    5 1-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-trifluoromethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00007
    6 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methyl- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3- methyl-1H-indol-2- ylmethyl)-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00008
    7 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3- methyl-1H-indol-2- ylmethyl)-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00009
    8 1-(6-Fluoro-1H-indol-2- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-trifluoromethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00010
    9 3-(4-Fluoro-phenyl)-3- methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H- indol-2-ylmethyl)-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00011
    10 3-Benzofuran-7-yl-1-(2,6- dichloro-pyridin-4- ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00012
    11 3-(2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran- 7-yl)-1-(6-fluoro-1H-indol- 2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00013
    12 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1- quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00014
    13 1-(2-Chloro-quinolin-4- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00015
    14 3-(4-Fluoro-phenyl)-3- methyl-1-quinolin-4- ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00016
    15 7-[3-Amino-3-(1H- benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)- 4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl- butyl]-2,3-dihydro- benzofuran-5-carbonitrile
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00017
    16 1-(6-Fluoro-1H- benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)- 3-(5-fluoro-2-methyl- phenyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00018
    17 2-[3-Amino-3-(1H- benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)- 4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl- butyl]-4-fluoro-phenol
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00019
    18 1-(1H-Benzoimidazol-2- ylmethyl)-3-(4-fluoro- phenyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00020
    19 1-(1H-Indol-2-ylmethyl)-3- methyl-3-pyridin-3-yl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00021
    20 1-(1H-Benzoimidazol-2- ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3- pyridin-4-yl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00022
    21 3-Methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H- indol-2-ylmethyl)-3- pyridin-3-yl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00023
    22 1-(6-Fluoro-1H-indol-2- ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3- pyridin-3-yl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00024
    23 3-(2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran- 7-yl)-1-(1H-indol-2- ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00025
    24 [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- methyl-amine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00026
    25 Ethyl-[3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]-amine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00027
    26 [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- propyl-amine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00028
    27 [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- isobutyl-amine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00029
    28 Butyl-[3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]-amine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00030
    29 [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- dimethyl-amine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00031
    30 N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- acetamide
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00032
    31 N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- formamide
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00033
    32 N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- methanesulfonamide
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00034
    33 1-(2,6-Dimethyl-pyridin-4- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00035
    34 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(1H- pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2- ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00036
    35 2-[2-Amino-4-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-4-methyl- 2-trifluoromethyl-pentyl]-4- methyl-1H-indole-6- carbonitrile
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00037
    36 N-'-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin- 4-ylmethyl-1- trifluoromethyl-butyl]- hydroxylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00038
    37 2-(3-Amino-4,4,4-trifluoro- 1,1-dimethyl-3-quinolin-4- ylmethyl-butyl)-4-fluoro- phenol
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00039

    and the tautomers, prodrugs, solvates, or salts thereof.
  • Selected compounds of formula (IA) include the following:
    • 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
    • 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
    • [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-isobutyl-amine;
    • [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-propyl-amine;
    • Butyl-[3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-amine; and
    • [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-methyl-amine;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • In a second general aspect, the instant invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB)
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00040
    wherein:
    • R1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl or aryl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano or amino.
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
    • R4 is C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, or C2-C5 alkynyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, amino, or oxo;
    • R5 is a heteroaryl group optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
        • wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, or trifluoromethyl;
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 alkoxy, C2-8 alkenyloxy, C2-8 alkynyloxy, hydroxy, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
    • R8 is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, carbocycle, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R8 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, oxo, trifluoromethyl, nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
    • wherein R8 cannot be trifluoromethyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, indenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl, chromanyl, dihydroindolyl, indolyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzothienyl, benzodioxolanyl, dihydrobenzoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzpyrazolyl, benzimidazolyl, dihydroquinolinyl, quinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, or pyrimidinyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, or amino;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C6 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
    • R4 is C1-C3 alkyl or C2-C3 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently methyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or oxo;
    • R5 is an imidazolyl, pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, diazaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, furanopyrimidinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, benzoxazolyl, oxazolopyridinyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolopyridinyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazolopyridinyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, phenyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C3 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C3 dialkylaminocarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
        • wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, oxo or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, C1-5 alkoxy, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, phenoxy, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, oxo or trifluoromethyl;
    • R8 is C1-5 alkyl, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, or phenyl-difluoromethyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R8 is independently methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, or trifluoromethyl;
    • wherein R8 cannot be trifluoromethyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, thienyl, naphthyl, chromanyl, pyridinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one or two substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, hydroxy, oxo or cyano;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a spiro cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl ring;
    • R4 is C1-C3 alkyl;
    • R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, phenyl, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, morpholinylcarbonyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, benzyl, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl, or oxo; and
    • R8 is C1-5 alkyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl or benzyl,
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl or pyridinyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, trifuoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, cyano or hydroxy;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
    • R4 is CH2;
    • R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano or trifluoromethyl,
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl, acetyl, formyl, methylsulfonyl or hydroxy, and
    • R8 is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl substituted with a methoxy group and a fluoro, or is a phenyl substituted with a hydroxy group and a fluoro;
    • R2 and R3 are each independently methyl;
    • R4 is CH2;
    • R5 is a quinolinyl, azaindolyl, pyridinyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl or cyano;
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl or isobutyl; and
    • R8 is methyl, cyclopropyl, or cyclohexylmethyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo or hydroxy;
        or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R4 is CH2.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R5 is a quinolinyl, azaindolyl, pyridinyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro or cyano;
        or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R8 is methyl, cyclohexylmethyl or cyclopropyl;
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • Yet another aspect of the invention is directed to compounds of Formula (IB) above, wherein:
    • R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, furanyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
      • wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone; and
    • R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl,
      or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • The following are representative compounds according to Formula (IB) of the invention:
    Comp. No. Compound Name Compound Structure
    38 1-(2,6-Dichloro-pyridin-4- ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-1,3- dimethyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00041
    39 1-Ethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl- 1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00042
    40 1-Cyclohexylmethyl-3-(5- fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1- (1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3- methyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00043
    41 1-(2-Chloro-quinolin-4- ylmethyl)-1-cyclopentyl-3- (5-fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-3-methyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00044
    42 1-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4- ylmethyl)-1- cyclopentylmethyl-3-(5- fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3- methyl-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00045
    43 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-1,3-dimethyl-1- quinolin-4-ylmethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00046
    44 1-Cyclopropyl-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1- quinolin-4-ylmethyl- butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00047
    45 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy- phenyl)-1,3-dimethyl-1-(1H- pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2- ylmethyl)-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00048
    46 1-Cyclopropyl-3-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1- (1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2- ylmethyl)-butylamine
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00049
    47 2-[3-Amino-1,1,3-trimethyl-4- (1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2- yl)-butyl]-4-fluoro-phenol
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00050
    48 2-[2-Amino-4-(5-fluoro-2- methoxy-phenyl)-2,4- dimethyl-pentyl]-4-methyl- 1H-indole-6-carbonitrile
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00051

    and the tautomers, prodrugs, solvates, or salts thereof.
  • Another aspect of the invention is directed to the methods for making the compounds according to the invention by the methods as described herein.
  • In another aspect of the invention, the compounds according to the invention are formulated into pharmaceutical compositions comprising an effective amount, preferably a pharmaceutically effective amount, of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
  • The invention also provides a method of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • The invention further provides a method of treating a disease-state or condition mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • In addition, the invention also provides a method of treating a disease-state or condition selected from: type II diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular diseases, hypertension, arteriosclerosis, neurological diseases, adrenal and pituitary tumors, and glaucoma, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
  • The invention provides a method of treating a disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes is selected from: (i) lung diseases; (ii) rheumatic diseases or autoimmune diseases or joint diseases; (iii) allergic diseases; (iv) vasculitis diseases; (v) dermatological diseases; (vi) renal diseases; (vii) hepatic diseases; (viii) gastrointestinal diseases; (ix) proctological diseases; (x) eye diseases; (xi) diseases of the ear, nose, and throat (ENT) area; (xii) neurological diseases; (xiii) blood diseases; (xiv) tumor diseases; (xv) endocrine diseases; (xvi) organ and tissue transplantations and graft-versus-host diseases; (xvii) severe states of shock; (xviii) substitution therapy; and (xix) pain of inflammatory genesis. In another preferred embodiment of the invention, the disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes is selected from: type I diabetes, osteoarthritis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, restenosis following percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, Alzheimer disease, acute and chronic pain, atherosclerosis, reperfusion injury, bone resorption diseases, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, thermal injury, multiple organ injury secondary to trauma, acute purulent meningitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, and syndromes associated with hemodialysis, leukopheresis, and granulocyte transfusion.
  • The invention further provides methods of treating the disease-states or conditions mentioned above, in a patient in need of such treatment, the methods comprising sequentially or simultaneously administering to the patient: (a) an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the present invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable glucocorticoid.
  • The invention further provides a method of assaying the glucocorticoid receptor function in a sample, comprising: (a) contacting the sample with a selected amount of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and (b) detecting the amount of the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof bound to glucocorticoid receptors in the sample. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof is labeled with a detectable marker selected from: a radiolabel, fluorescent tag, a chemiluminescent tag, a chromophore, and a spin label.
  • The invention also provides a method of imaging the glucocorticoid receptor distribution in a sample or patient, the method comprising: (a) contacting the sample or administering to a patient a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof having a detectable marker; (b) detecting the spatial distribution and amount of the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof having a detectable marker bound to glucocorticoid receptors in the sample or patient using an imaging means to obtain an image; and (c) displaying an image of the spatial distribution and amount of the compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof having a detectable marker bound to glucocorticoid receptors in the sample. In a preferred embodiment of the invention, the imaging means is selected from: radioscintigraphy, nuclear magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), computed tomography (CT scan), or positron emission tomography (PET).
  • The invention also provides a kit for the in vitro diagnostic determination of the glucocorticoid receptor function in a sample, comprising: (a) a diagnostically effective amount of a compound according to the invention or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof, and (b) instructions for use of the diagnostic kit.
    • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
  • Definition of Terms and Conventions Used
  • Terms not specifically defined herein should be given the meanings that would be given to them by one of skill in the art in light of the disclosure and the context. As used in the specification and appended claims, however, unless specified to the contrary, the following terms have the meaning indicated and the following conventions are adhered to.
  • A. Chemical Nomenclature, Terms, and Conventions
  • In the groups, radicals, or moieties defined below, the number of carbon atoms is often specified preceding the group, for example, C1-C10 alkyl means an alkyl group or radical having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The term “lower” applied to any carbon-containing group means a group containing from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, as appropriate to the group (i.e., a cyclic group must have at least 3 atoms to constitute a ring). In general, for groups comprising two or more subgroups, the last named group is the radical attachment point, for example, “alkylaryl” means a monovalent radical of the formula Alk-Ar—, while “arylalkyl” means a monovalent radical of the formula Ar-Alk- (where Alk is an alkyl group and Ar is an aryl group). Furthermore, the use of a term designating a monovalent radical where a divalent radical is appropriate shall be construed to designate the respective divalent radical and vice versa. Unless otherwise specified, conventional definitions of terms control and conventional stable atom valences are presumed and achieved in all formulas and groups.
  • The terms “alkyl” or “alkyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, 1-methylethyl (isopropyl), n-butyl, n-pentyl, 1,1-dimethylethyl (tert-butyl), and the like. It may be abbreviated “Alk”.
  • The terms “alkenyl” or “alkenyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical containing at least one carbon-carbon double bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenyl, propenyl, n-butenyl, isobutenyl, 3-methylbut-2-enyl, n-pentenyl, heptenyl, octenyl, decenyl, and the like.
  • The terms “alkynyl” or “alkynyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethynyl, propynyl, n-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 3-methylbutynyl, n-pentynyl, heptynyl, octynyl, decynyl, and the like.
  • The terms “alkylene” or “alkylene group” mean a branched or straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon divalent radical having the specified number of carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene, ethylene, propylene, n-butylene, and the like, and may alternatively and equivalently be denoted herein as -(alkyl)-.
  • The terms “alkenylene” or “alkenylene group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon divalent radical having the specified number of carbon atoms and at least one carbon-carbon double bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethenylene, propenylene, n-butenylene, and the like, and may alternatively and equivalently be denoted herein as -(alkylenyl)-.
  • The terms “alkynylene” or “alkynylene group” mean a branched or straight-chain aliphatic hydrocarbon divalent radical containing at least one carbon-carbon triple bond. This term is exemplified by groups such as ethynylene, propynylene, n-butynylene, 2-butynylene, 3-methylbutynylene, n-pentynylene, heptynylene, octynylene, decynylene, and the like, and may alternatively and equivalently be denoted herein as -(alkynyl)-.
  • The terms “alkoxy” or “alkoxy group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkO—, where Alk is an alkyl group. This term is exemplified by groups such as methoxy, ethoxy, propoxy, isopropoxy, butoxy, sec-butoxy, tert-butoxy, pentoxy, and the like.
  • The terms “aryloxy”, “aryloxy group”, mean a monovalent radical of the formula ArO—, where Ar is aryl. This term is exemplified by groups such as phenoxy, naphthoxy, and the like.
  • The term “oxo” means a double-bonded divalent oxygen radical of the formula (═O), For instance, one example of an alkyl group substituted by an “oxo” would be a group of the formula Alk-C(O)-Alk, wherein each Alk is an alkyl.
  • The terms “alkylcarbonyl”, “alkylcarbonyl group”, “alkanoyl”, or “alkanoyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkC(O)—, where Alk is alkyl or hydrogen.
  • The terms “arylcarbonyl”, “arylcarbonyl group”, “aroyl” or “aroyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula ArC(O)—, where Ar is aryl.
  • The terms “acyl” or “acyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula RC(O)—, where R is a substituent selected from hydrogen or an organic substituent. Exemplary substituents include alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and the like. As such, the terms comprise alkylcarbonyl groups and arylcarbonyl groups.
  • The terms “acylamino” or “acylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula RC(O)N(R)—, where each R is a substituent selected from hydrogen or a substituent group.
  • The terms “alkoxycarbonyl” or “alkoxycarbonyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkO-C(O)—, where Alk is alkyl. Exemplary alkoxycarbonyl groups include methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butyloxycarbonyl, and the like.
  • The terms “alkylaminocarbonyloxy” or “alkylaminocarbonyloxy group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula R2NC(O)O—, where each R is independently hydrogen or lower alkyl.
  • The term “alkoxycarbonylamino” or “alkoxycarbonylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula ROC(O)NH—, where R is lower alkyl.
  • The terms “alkylcarbonylamino” or “alkylcarbonylamino group” or “alkanoylamino” or “alkanoylamino groups” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkC(O)NH—, where Alk is alkyl. Exemplary alkylcarbonylamino groups include acetamido (CH3C(O)NH—).
  • The terms “alkylaminocarbonyloxy” or “alkylaminocarbonyloxy group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkNHC(O)O—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • The terms “amino” or “amino group” mean an —NH2 group.
  • The terms “alkylamino” or “alkylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula (Alk)NH—, where Alk is alkyl. Exemplary alkylamino groups include methylamino, ethylamino, propylamino, butylamino, tert-butylamino, and the like.
  • The terms “dialkylamino” or “dialkylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula (Alk)(Alk)N—, where each Alk is independently alkyl. Exemplary dialkylamino groups include dimethylamino, methylethylamino, diethylamino, dipropylamino, ethylpropylamino, and the like.
  • The terms “substituted amino” or “substituted amino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula —NR2, where each R is independently a substituent selected from hydrogen or the specified substituents (but where both Rs cannot be hydrogen). Exemplary substituents include alkyl, alkanoyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, and the like.
  • The terms “alkoxycarbonylamino” or “alkoxycarbonylamino group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkOC(O)NH—, where Alk is alkyl.
  • The terms “ureido” or “ureido group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula R2NC(O)NH—, where each R is independently hydrogen or alkyl.
  • The terms “halogen” or “halogen group” mean a fluoro, chloro, bromo, or iodo group.
  • The term “halo” means one or more hydrogen atoms of the group are replaced by halogen groups.
  • The terms “haloalkyl” or “haloalkyl group” mean a branched or straight-chain saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon monovalent radical, wherein one or more hydrogen atoms thereof are each independently replaced with halogen atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as chloromethyl, 1,2-dibromoethyl, 1,1,1-trifluoropropyl, 2-iodobutyl, 1-chloro-2-bromo-3-fluoropentyl, and the like.
  • The terms “sulfanyl”, “sulfanyl group”, “thioether”, or “thioether group” mean a divalent radical of the formula —S—.
  • The terms “alkylthio” or “alkylthio group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula AlkS—, where Alk is alkyl. Exemplary groups include methylthio, ethylthio, n-propylthio, isopropylthio, n-butylthio, and the like.
  • The terms “sulfonyl” or “sulfonyl group” mean a divalent radical of the formula —SO2—.
  • The terms “sulfonylamino” or “sulfonylamino group” mean a divalent radical of the formula —SO2NR—, where R is a hydrogen or a substituent group.
  • The terms “aminosulfonyl” or “aminosulfonyl group” mean a monovalent radical of the formula NR2SO2—, where R is each independently a hydrogen or a substituent group.
  • The terms “carbocycle”, “carbocyclyl”, “carbocyclic group” or “carbocyclyl group” mean a stable aliphatic 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent or divalent radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the carbocycle may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. The term comprises cycloalkyl (including spiro cycloalkyl), cycloalkylene, cycloalkenyl, cycloalkenylene, cycloalkynyl, and cycloalkynylene, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkyl” or “cycloalkyl group” mean a stable aliphatic saturated 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary cycloalkyl groups include cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclononyl, cyclodecyl, norbornanyl, adamantyl, tetrahydronaphthyl (tetralin), 1-decalinyl, bicyclo[2.2.2]octanyl, 1-methylcyclopropyl, 2-methylcyclopentyl, 2-methylcyclooctyl, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkenyl” or “cycloalkenyl group” mean a stable aliphatic 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon double bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkenyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclononenyl, cyclodecenyl, norbornenyl, 2-methylcyclopentenyl, 2-methylcyclooctenyl, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkynyl” or “cycloalkynyl group” mean a stable aliphatic 8- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 8- to 10-membered monocyclic or 12- to 15-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkynyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary cycloalkynyl groups include, cyclooctynyl, cyclononynyl, cyclodecynyl, 2-methylcyclooctynyl, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkylene” or “cycloalkylene group” mean a stable saturated aliphatic 3- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic divalent radical consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkyl ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary cycloalkylene groups include cyclopentylene, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkenylene” or “cycloalkenylene group” mean a stable aliphatic 5- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic divalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon double bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkenylene ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary cycloalkenylene groups include cyclopentenylene, cyclohexenylene, cycloheptenylene, cyclooctenylene, cyclononenylene, cyclodecenylene, norbornenylene, 2-methylcyclopentenylene, 2-methylcyclooctenylene, and the like.
  • The terms “cycloalkynylene” or “cycloalkynylene group” mean a stable aliphatic 8- to 15-membered monocyclic or polycyclic divalent radical having at least one carbon-carbon triple bond and consisting solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 8- to 10-membered monocyclic or 12- to 15-membered bicyclic ring. Unless otherwise specified, the cycloalkynylene ring may be attached at any carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary cycloalkynylene groups include cyclooctynylene, cyclononynylene, cyclodecynylene, 2-methylcyclooctynylene, and the like.
  • The terms “aryl” or “aryl group” mean an aromatic carbocyclic monovalent or divalent radical of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl or phenylene) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., naphthyl or anthranyl). Unless otherwise specified, the aryl ring may be attached at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary aryl groups include phenyl, naphthyl, anthryl, phenanthryl, indanyl, indenyl, biphenyl, and the like. It may be abbreviated “Ar”.
  • The terms “heteroaryl” or “heteroaryl group” mean a stable aromatic 5- to 14-membered, monocyclic or polycyclic monovalent or divalent radical which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic radical, having from one to four heteroatoms in the ring(s) independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, wherein any sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and any nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be oxidized or be quaternized. Unless otherwise specified, the heteroaryl ring may be attached at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary and preferred heteroaryls include furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, imidazolyl, pyrazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, triazolyl, tetrazolyl, thiadiazolyl, pyridinyl, pyridazinyl, pyrimidinyl, pyrazinyl, triazinyl, indolizinyl, azaindolizinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, diazaindolyl, dihydroindolyl, dihydroazaindoyl, isoindolyl, azaisoindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, furanopyrimidinyl, furanopyrazinyl, furanopyridazinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydrofuranopyridinyl, dihydrofuranopyrimidinyl, benzodioxolanyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, thienopyrazinyl, thienopyridazinyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, dihydrothienopyridinyl, dihydrothienopyrimidinyl, indazolyl, azaindazolyl, diazaindazolyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazopyridinyl, benzthiazolyl, thiazolopyridinyl, thiazolopyrimidinyl, benzoxazolyl, oxazolopyridinyl, oxazolopyrimidinyl, benzisoxazolyl, purinyl, chromanyl, azachromanyl, quinolizinyl, quinolinyl, dihydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, cinnolinyl, azacinnolinyl, phthalazinyl, azaphthalazinyl, quinazolinyl, azaquinazolinyl, quinoxalinyl, azaquinoxalinyl, naphthyridinyl, dihydronaphthyridinyl, tetrahydronaphthyridinyl, pteridinyl, carbazolyl, acridinyl, phenazinyl, phenothiazinyl, and phenoxazinyl, and the like.
  • The terms “heterocycle”, “heterocycle group”, “heterocyclyl”, or “heterocyclyl group” mean a stable non-aromatic 5- to 14-membered monocyclic or polycyclic, monovalent or divalent, ring which may comprise one or more fused or bridged ring(s), preferably a 5- to 7-membered monocyclic or 7- to 10-membered bicyclic ring, having from one to three heteroatoms in the ring(s) independently selected from nitrogen, oxygen, and sulfur, wherein any sulfur heteroatoms may optionally be oxidized and any nitrogen heteroatom may optionally be oxidized or be quaternized. Unless otherwise specified, the heterocyclyl ring may be attached at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure and, if substituted, may be substituted at any suitable heteroatom or carbon atom which results in a stable structure. Exemplary and preferred heterocycles include pyrrolinyl, pyrrolidinyl, pyrazolinyl, pyrazolidinyl, piperidinyl, morpholinyl, thiomorpholinyl, piperazinyl, tetrahydropyranyl, tetrahydrothiopyranyl, tetrahydrofuranyl, hexahydropyrimidinyl, hexahydropyridazinyl, and the like.
  • The term “compounds of Formula (I)” and equivalent expressions are mean to embrace either or both of compounds of Formula (IA) and compounds of Formula (IB) as the context permits.
  • The term “compounds of the invention” and equivalent expressions are meant to embrace compounds of Formula (I) as herein described, including the tautomers, the prodrugs, the salts, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable salts, and the solvates and hydrates thereof, where the context so permits. In general and preferably, the compounds of the invention and the formulas designating the compounds of the invention are understood to only include the stable compounds thereof and exclude unstable compounds, even if an unstable compound might be considered to be literally embraced by the compound formula. Similarly, reference to intermediates, whether or not they themselves are claimed, is meant to embrace their salts and solvates, where the context so permits. For the sake of clarity, particular instances when the context so permits are sometimes indicated in the text, but these instances are purely illustrative and it is not intended to exclude other instances when the context so permits.
  • Specific compounds of the invention may be depicted by both chemical structure and by chemical name. In the event that there may be a conflict between the chemical structure and chemical name set forth, it is understood that the chemical structure will control.
  • The terms “optional” or “optionally” mean that the subsequently described event or circumstances may or may not occur, and that the description includes instances where the event or circumstance occurs and instances in which it does not. For example, “optionally substituted aryl” means that the aryl radical may or may not be substituted and that the description includes both substituted aryl radicals and aryl radicals having no substitution.
  • The terms “stable compound” or “stable structure” mean a compound that is sufficiently robust to survive isolation to a useful degree of purity from a reaction mixture, and formulation into an efficacious therapeutic or diagnostic agent. For example, a compound which would have a “dangling valency” or is a carbanion is not a compound contemplated by the invention.
  • The term “substituted” means that any one or more hydrogens on an atom of a group or moiety, whether specifically designated or not, is replaced with a selection from the indicated group of substituents, provided that the atom's normal valency is not exceeded and that the substitution results in a stable compound. If a bond to a substituent is shown to cross the bond connecting two atoms in a ring, then such substituent may be bonded to any atom on the ring. When a substituent is listed without indicating the atom via which such substituent is bonded to the rest of the compound, then such substituent may be bonded via any atom in such substituent. For example, when the substituent is piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or tetrazolyl, unless specified otherwise, such piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or tetrazolyl group may be bonded to the rest of the compound of the invention via any atom in such piperazinyl, piperidinyl, or tetrazolyl group. Generally, when any substituent or group occurs more than one time in any constituent or compound, its definition on each occurrence is independent of its definition at every other occurrence. Thus, for example, if a group is shown to be substituted with 0 to 2 R5, then such group is optionally substituted with up to two R5 groups and R5 at each occurrence is selected independently from the defined list of possible R5. Such combinations of substituents and/or variables, however, are permissible only if such combinations result in stable compounds.
  • In a specific embodiment, the term “about” or “approximately” means within 20%, preferably within 10%, and more preferably within 5% of a given value or range.
  • The yield of each of the reactions described herein is expressed as a percentage of the theoretical yield.
  • B. Salt, Prodrug, Derivative, and Solvate Terms and Conventions
  • The terms “prodrug” or “prodrug derivative” mean a covalently-bonded derivative or carrier of the parent compound or active drug substance which undergoes at least some biotransformation prior to exhibiting its pharmacological effect(s). In general, such prodrugs have metabolically cleavable groups and are rapidly transformed in vivo to yield the parent compound, for example, by hydrolysis in blood, and generally include esters and amide analogs of the parent compounds. The prodrug is formulated with the objectives of improved chemical stability, improved patient acceptance and compliance, improved bioavailability, prolonged duration of action, improved organ selectivity, improved formulation (e.g., increased hydrosolubility), and/or decreased side effects (e.g., toxicity). In general, prodrugs themselves have weak or no biological activity and are stable under ordinary conditions. Prodrugs can be readily prepared from the parent compounds using methods known in the art, such as those described in A Textbook of Drug Design and Development, Krogsgaard-Larsen and H. Bundgaard (eds.), Gordon & Breach, 1991, particularly Chapter 5: “Design and Applications of Prodrugs”; Design of Prodrugs, H. Bundgaard (ed.), Elsevier, 1985; Prodrugs: Topical and Ocular Drug Delivery, K. B. Sloan (ed.), Marcel Dekker, 1998; Methods in Enzymology, K. Widder et al. (eds.), Vol. 42, Academic Press, 1985, particularly pp. 309-396; Burger's Medicinal Chemistry and Drug Discovery, 5th Ed., M. Wolff (ed.), John Wiley & Sons, 1995, particularly Vol. 1 and pp. 172-178 and pp. 949-982; Pro-Drugs as Novel Delivery Systems, T. Higuchi and V. Stella (eds.), Am. Chem. Soc., 1975; and Bioreversible Carriers in Drug Design, E. B. Roche (ed.), Elsevier, 1987, each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable prodrug” as used herein means a prodrug of a compound of the invention which is, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, and effective for their intended use, as well as the zwitterionic forms, where possible.
  • The term “salt” means an ionic form of the parent compound or the product of the reaction between the parent compound with a suitable acid or base to make the acid salt or base salt of the parent compound. Salts of the compounds of the present invention can be synthesized from the parent compounds which contain a basic or acidic moiety by conventional chemical methods. Generally, the salts are prepared by reacting the free base or acid parent compound with stoichiometric amounts or with an excess of the desired salt-forming inorganic or organic acid or base in a suitable solvent or various combinations of solvents.
  • The term “pharmaceutically acceptable salt” means a salt of a compound of the invention which is, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of humans and lower animals without undue toxicity, irritation, allergic response, and the like, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio, generally water or oil-soluble or dispersible, and effective for their intended use. The term includes pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salts and pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salts. As the compounds of the present invention are useful in both free base and salt form, in practice, the use of the salt form amounts to use of the base form. Lists of suitable salts are found in, e.g., S. M. Birge et al., J. Pharm. Sci., 1977, 66, pp. 1-19, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety.
  • The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt” means those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free bases and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable, formed with inorganic acids such as hydrochloric acid, hydrobromic acid, hydroiodic acid, sulfuric acid, sulfamic acid, nitric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like, and organic acids such as acetic acid, trichloroacetic acid, trifluoroacetic acid, adipic acid, alginic acid, ascorbic acid, aspartic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, benzoic acid, 2-acetoxybenzoic acid, butyric acid, camphoric acid, camphorsulfonic acid, cinnamic acid, citric acid, digluconic acid, ethanesulfonic acid, glutamic acid, glycolic acid, glycerophosphoric acid, hemisulfic acid, heptanoic acid, hexanoic acid, formic acid, fumaric acid, 2-hydroxyethanesulfonic acid (isethionic acid), lactic acid, maleic acid, hydroxymaleic acid, malic acid, malonic acid, mandelic acid, mesitylenesulfonic acid, methanesulfonic acid, naphthalenesulfonic acid, nicotinic acid, 2-naphthalenesulfonic acid, oxalic acid, pamoic acid, pectinic acid, phenylacetic acid, 3-phenylpropionic acid, picric acid, pivalic acid, propionic acid, pyruvic acid, pyruvic acid, salicylic acid, stearic acid, succinic acid, sulfanilic acid, tartaric acid, p-toluenesulfonic acid, undecanoic acid, and the like.
  • The term “pharmaceutically-acceptable base addition salt” means those salts which retain the biological effectiveness and properties of the free acids and which are not biologically or otherwise undesirable, formed with inorganic bases such as ammonia or hydroxide, carbonate, or bicarbonate of ammonium or a metal cation such as sodium, potassium, lithium, calcium, magnesium, iron, zinc, copper, manganese, aluminum, and the like. Particularly preferred are the ammonium, potassium, sodium, calcium, and magnesium salts. Salts derived from pharmaceutically-acceptable organic nontoxic bases include salts of primary, secondary, and tertiary amines, quaternary amine compounds, substituted amines including naturally occurring substituted amines, cyclic amines and basic ion-exchange resins, such as methylamine, dimethylamine, trimethylamine, ethylamine, diethylamine, triethylamine, isopropylamine, tripropylamine, tributylamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, 2-dimethylaminoethanol, 2-diethylaminoethanol, dicyclohexylamine, lysine, arginine, histidine, caffeine, hydrabamine, choline, betaine, ethylenediamine, glucosamine, methylglucamine, theobromine, purines, piperazine, piperidine, N-ethylpiperidine, tetramethylammonium compounds, tetraethylammonium compounds, pyridine, N,N-dimethylaniline, N-methylpiperidine, N-methylmorpholine, dicyclohexylamine, dibenzylamine, N,N-dibenzylphenethylamine, 1-ephenamine, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamine, polyamine resins, and the like. Particularly preferred organic nontoxic bases are isopropylamine, diethylamine, ethanolamine, trimethylamine, dicyclohexylamine, choline, and caffeine.
  • The term “solvate” means a physical association of a compound with one or more solvent molecules or a complex of variable stoichiometry formed by a solute (for example, a compound of Formula (I)) and a solvent, for example, water, ethanol, or acetic acid. This physical association may involve varying degrees of ionic and covalent bonding, including hydrogen bonding. In certain instances, the solvate will be capable of isolation, for example, when one or more solvent molecules are incorporated in the crystal lattice of the crystalline solid. In general, the solvents selected do not interfere with the biological activity of the solute. Solvates encompasses both solution-phase and isolatable solvates. Representative solvates include hydrates, ethanolates, methanolates, and the like.
  • The term “hydrate” means a solvate wherein the solvent molecule(s) is/are H2O.
  • The compounds of the present invention as discussed below include the free base or acid thereof, their salts, solvates, and prodrugs and may include oxidized sulfur atoms or quaternized nitrogen atoms in their structure, although not explicitly stated or shown, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable forms thereof. Such forms, particularly the pharmaceutically acceptable forms, are intended to be embraced by the appended claims.
  • C. Isomer Terms and Conventions
  • The term “isomers” means compounds having the same number and kind of atoms, and hence the same molecular weight, but differing with respect to the arrangement or configuration of their atoms in space. The term includes stereoisomers and geometric isomers.
  • The terms “stereoisomer” or “optical isomer” means a stable isomer that has at least one chiral atom or restricted rotation giving rise to perpendicular dissymmetric planes (e.g., certain biphenyls, allenes, and spiro compounds) and can rotate plane-polarized light. Because asymmetric centers and other chemical structure exist in the compounds of the invention which may give rise to stereoisomerism, the invention contemplates stereoisomers and mixtures thereof. The compounds of the invention and their salts include asymmetric carbon atoms and may therefore exist as single stereoisomers, racemates, and as mixtures of enantiomers and diastereomers. Typically, such compounds will be prepared as a racemic mixture. If desired, however, such compounds can be prepared or isolated as pure stereoisomers, i.e., as individual enantiomers or diastereomers, or as stereoisomer-enriched mixtures. As discussed in more detail below, individual stereoisomers of compounds are prepared by synthesis from optically active starting materials containing the desired chiral centers or by preparation of mixtures of enantiomeric products followed by separation or resolution, such as conversion to a mixture of diastereomers followed by separation or recrystallization, chromatographic techniques, use of chiral resolving agents, or direct separation of the enantiomers on chiral chromatographic columns. Starting compounds of particular stereochemistry are either commercially available or are made by the methods described below and resolved by techniques well-known in the art.
  • The term “enantiomers” means a pair of stereoisomers that are non-superimposable mirror images of each other.
  • The terms “diastereoisomers” or “diastereomers” mean stereoisomers which are not mirror images of each other.
  • The terms “racemic mixture” or “racemate” mean a mixture containing equal parts of individual enantiomers.
  • The term “non-racemic mixture” means a mixture containing unequal parts of individual enantiomers.
  • The term “geometrical isomer” means a stable isomer which results from restricted freedom of rotation about double bonds (e.g., cis-2-butene and trans-2-butene) or in a cyclic structure (e.g., cis-1,3-dichlorocyclobutane and trans-1,3-dichlorocyclobutane). Because carbon-carbon double (olefinic) bonds, C═N double bonds, cyclic structures, and the like may be present in the compounds of the invention, the invention contemplates each of the various stable geometric isomers and mixtures thereof resulting from the arrangement of substituents around these double bonds and in these cyclic structures. The substituents and the isomers are designated using the cis/trans convention or using the E or Z system, wherein the term “E” means higher order substituents on opposite sides of the double bond, and the term “Z” means higher order substituents on the same side of the double bond. A thorough discussion of E and Z isomerism is provided in J. March, Advanced Organic Chemistry: Reactions, Mechanisms, and Structure, 4th ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1992, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Several of the following examples represent single E isomers, single Z isomers, and mixtures of E/Z isomers. Determination of the E and Z isomers can be done by analytical methods such as x-ray crystallography, 1H NMR, and 13C NMR.
  • Some of the compounds of the invention can exist in more than one tautomeric form. As mentioned above, the compounds of the invention include all such tautomers.
  • It is well-known in the art that the biological and pharmacological activity of a compound is sensitive to the stereochemistry of the compound. Thus, for example, enantiomers often exhibit strikingly different biological activity including differences in pharmacokinetic properties, including metabolism, protein binding, and the like, and pharmacological properties, including the type of activity displayed, the degree of activity, toxicity, and the like. Thus, one skilled in the art will appreciate that one enantiomer may be more active or may exhibit beneficial effects when enriched relative to the other enantiomer or when separated from the other enantiomer. Additionally, one skilled in the art would know how to separate, enrich, or selectively prepare the enantiomers of the compounds of the invention from this disclosure and the knowledge in the art.
  • Thus, although the racemic form of drug may be used, it is often less effective than administering an equal amount of enantiomerically pure drug; indeed, in some cases, one enantiomer may be pharmacologically inactive and would merely serve as a simple diluent. For example, although ibuprofen had been previously administered as a racemate, it has been shown that only the S-isomer of ibuprofen is effective as an anti-inflammatory agent (in the case of ibuprofen, however, although the R-isomer is inactive, it is converted in vivo to the S-isomer, thus, the rapidity of action of the racemic form of the drug is less than that of the pure S-isomer). Furthermore, the pharmacological activities of enantiomers may have distinct biological activity. For example, S-penicillamine is a therapeutic agent for chronic arthritis, while R-penicillamine is toxic.
  • Indeed, some purified enantiomers have advantages over the racemates, as it has been reported that purified individual isomers have faster transdermal penetration rates compared to the racemic mixture. See U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,114,946 and 4,818,541.
  • Thus, if one enantiomer is pharmacologically more active, less toxic, or has a preferred disposition in the body than the other enantiomer, it would be therapeutically more beneficial to administer that enantiomer preferentially. In this way, the patient undergoing treatment would be exposed to a lower total dose of the drug and to a lower dose of an enantiomer that is possibly toxic or an inhibitor of the other enantiomer.
  • Preparation of pure enantiomers or mixtures of desired enantiomeric excess (ee) or enantiomeric purity are accomplished by one or more of the many methods of (a) separation or resolution of enantiomers, or (b) enantioselective synthesis known to those of skill in the art, or a combination thereof. These resolution methods generally rely on chiral recognition and include, for example, chromatography using chiral stationary phases, enantioselective host-guest complexation, resolution or synthesis using chiral auxiliaries, enantioselective synthesis, enzymatic and nonenzymatic kinetic resolution, or spontaneous enantioselective crystallization. Such methods are disclosed generally in Chiral Separation Techniques: A Practical Approach (2nd Ed.), G. Subramanian (ed.), Wiley-VCH, 2000; T. E. Beesley and R. P. W. Scott, Chiral Chromatography, John Wiley & Sons, 1999; and Satinder Ahuja, Chiral Separations by Chromatography, Am. Chem. Soc., 2000. Furthermore, there are equally well-known methods for the quantitation of enantiomeric excess or purity, for example, GC, HPLC, CE, or NMR, and assignment of absolute configuration and conformation, for example, CD ORD, X-ray crystallography, or NMR.
  • In general, all tautomeric forms and isomeric forms and mixtures, whether individual geometric isomers or stereoisomers or racemic or non-racemic mixtures, of a chemical structure or compound is intended, unless the specific stereochemistry or isomeric form is specifically indicated in the compound name or structure.
  • D. Pharmaceutical Administration and Diagnostic and Treatment Terms and Conventions
  • The term “patient” includes both human and non-human mammals.
  • The term “effective amount” means an amount of a compound according to the invention which, in the context of which it is administered or used, is sufficient to achieve the desired effect or result. Depending on the context, the term effective amount may include or be synonymous with a pharmaceutically effective amount or a diagnostically effective amount.
  • The terms “pharmaceutically effective amount” or “therapeutically effective amount” means an amount of a compound according to the invention which, when administered to a patient in need thereof, is sufficient to effect treatment for disease-states, conditions, or disorders for which the compounds have utility. Such an amount would be sufficient to elicit the biological or medical response of a tissue, system, or patient that is sought by a researcher or clinician. The amount of a compound of according to the invention which constitutes a therapeutically effective amount will vary depending on such factors as the compound and its biological activity, the composition used for administration, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of treatment, the type of disease-state or disorder being treated and its severity, drugs used in combination with or coincidentally with the compounds of the invention, and the age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet of the patient. Such a therapeutically effective amount can be determined routinely by one of ordinary skill in the art having regard to their own knowledge, the prior art, and this disclosure.
  • The term “diagnostically effective amount” means an amount of a compound according to the invention which, when used in a diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay, is sufficient to achieve the desired diagnostic effect or the desired biological activity necessary for the diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay. Such an amount would be sufficient to elicit the biological or medical response in a diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay, which may include a biological or medical response in a patient or in a in vitro or in vivo tissue or system, that is sought by a researcher or clinician. The amount of a compound according to the invention which constitutes a diagnostically effective amount will vary depending on such factors as the compound and its biological activity, the diagnostic method, apparatus, or assay used, the composition used for administration, the time of administration, the route of administration, the rate of excretion of the compound, the duration of administration, drugs and other compounds used in combination with or coincidentally with the compounds of the invention, and, if a patient is the subject of the diagnostic administration, the age, body weight, general health, sex, and diet of the patient. Such a diagnostically effective amount can be determined routinely by one of ordinary skill in the art having regard to their own knowledge, the prior art, and this disclosure.
  • The term “modulate” means the ability of a compound to alter the function of the glucocorticoid receptor by, for example, binding to and stimulating or inhibiting the glucocorticoid receptor functional responses.
  • The term “modulator” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that modulates the glucocorticoid receptor function. As such, modulators include, but are not limited to, agonists, partial agonists, antagonists, and partial antagonists.
  • The term “agonist” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that, when bound to the glucocorticoid receptor, enhances or increases the glucocorticoid receptor function. As such, agonists include partial agonists and full agonists.
  • The term “full agonist” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that evokes the maximal stimulatory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even when there are spare (unoccupied) glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • The term “partial agonist” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that is unable to evoke the maximal stimulatory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even at concentrations sufficient to saturate the glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • The term “antagonist” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that directly or indirectly inhibits or suppresses the glucocorticoid receptor function. As such, antagonists include partial antagonists and full antagonists.
  • The term “full antagonist” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that evokes the maximal inhibitory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even when there are spare (unoccupied) glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • The term “partial antagonist” in the context of describing compounds according to the invention means a compound that is unable to evoke the maximal inhibitory response from the glucocorticoid receptor, even at concentrations sufficient to saturate the glucocorticoid receptors present.
  • The terms “treating” or “treatment” mean the treatment of a disease-state in a patient, and include:
      • (i) preventing the disease-state from occurring in a patient, in particular, when such patient is genetically or otherwise predisposed to the disease-state but has not yet been diagnosed as having it;
      • (ii) inhibiting or ameliorating the disease-state in a patient, e.g., arresting or slowing its development, or inhibiting or ameliorating a symptom of the disease state; or
      • (iii) relieving the disease-state in a patient, i.e., causing regression or cure of the disease-state.
        General Synthetic Methods
  • The invention also provides processes for making compounds of Formulas (IA) and (IB). In the schemes below directed to the synthesis of Formula (IA) compounds, unless specified otherwise, R1 to R7 in the formulas shall have the meaning of R1 to R7 in the Formula (IA) of the invention described hereinabove. Likewise, in the schemes below directed to the synthesis of Formula (IB) compounds, unless specified otherwise, R1 to R8 in the formulas shall have the meaning of R1 to R8 in the Formula (IB) of the invention described hereinabove. Intermediates used in the preparation of compounds of the invention are either commercially available or readily prepared by methods known to those skilled in the art. Additional methods for preparing particular intermediates are also to be found in U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/367,801 filed Mar. 26, 2002, (Y. Bekkali, et al; Attny. Docket No. 9/239 PV) and in U.S. Provisional Application No. 60/367,758 filed Mar. 26, 2002, (Y. Bekkali, et al; Attny Docket No. 9/240 PV), both of which applications are herein incorporated by reference.
  • Optimum reaction conditions and reaction times may vary depending on the particular reactants used. Unless otherwise specified, solvents, temperatures, pressures, and other reaction conditions may be readily selected by one of ordinary skill in the art. Specific procedures are provided in the Synthetic Examples section. Typically, reaction progress may be monitored by thin layer chromatography (TLC), if desired, and intermediates and products may be purified by chromatography on silica gel and/or by recrystallization.
  • Compounds of Formula (IA) wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen may be prepared by the method outlined in Scheme I (Method A):
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00052
  • As illustrated in Scheme I (Method A), an ester intermediate of Formula (II) where R′ is Me or Et, is reduced with a suitable reducing agent, such as lithium aluminum hydride, in a suitable solvent, such as THF or diethyl ether, to produce the 1,2-diol of Formula (III). Oxidative cleavage of 1,2-diols is well known in the art and may be achieved with periodic acid or lead tetraacetate, for example, in a suitable solvent, such as methanol, to provide the ketone (IV). Conversion of ketone (IV) to a sulfinic acid amide, such as a t-butylsulfinic acid amide, may be accomplished by reaction with a suitable Lewis acid, preferably Ti(OEt)4, and an alkylsulfinamide of the formula RS(O)NH2 (wherein R is alkyl), preferably t-butylsulfinamide, to produce V. Reaction of V with a suitable organometallic reagent R5R4M, such as a Grignard reagent (M is MgBr, MgCl or MgI) or an organolithium reagent (M is Li), in a suitable solvent such as THF or diethyl ether, provides the desired compound of Formula (IA) upon hydrolysis. Such organolithium reagents and alkylmagnesium halides or Grignard reagents are well known in the art. For example, Grignard reagents are easily prepared by the reaction of the corresponding alkyl halide with magnesium metal in a suitable solvent, such as ether or THF, under anhydrous conditions.
  • Intermediates of Formula (II) may be prepared by methods known in the art. Two procedures are illustrated in Scheme II (Methods B and C):
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00053
  • For an R1 group which will undergo a Friedel-Crafts alkylation (Method B), one may react a pyruvate (VI) bearing CF3 and where R′ is Me or Et, with a bromomethyl olefin (VII) bearing an R2 and an olefin group (═CH—R″) that will become R3, in the presence of manganese and a Lewis acid such as zinc chloride in a suitable solvent such as THF to produce a 2-hydroxy ester (VIII). Friedel-Crafts alkylation of R1 with this intermediate (VIII) in the presence of a suitable Lewis acid such as aluminum chloride provides (II) (R3=—CH2R″). Alternatively (Method C) one may perform a Grignard reaction with a pyruvate bearing CF3 (VI) and an ethyl magnesium halide (IX) bearing R1, R2, and R3 to provide the desired intermediate (II).
  • Compounds of Formula (IA) wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen may also be prepared by the method outlined in Scheme III (Method D):
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00054
  • In this approach, trifluoroacetic anhydride (X) and N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride (XI) are coupled under basic conditions, e.g., in the presence of a suitable base, to afford trifluoroacetamide (XII) (Weinreb amide). The Weinreb amide (XII) is reacted with a vinyl magnesium bromide bearing R2 and R3 in a suitable solvent to afford the trifluoromethylenone intermediate (XIII). This trifluoromethylenone intermediate is treated with an organocopper reagent R1Cu (not shown), derived in-situ from a Grignard or organolithium reagent R1-M (where M is Li or MgX where X is halogen) by treating with a copper salt CuX (where X is halogen), in a suitable solvent to afford the 1,4-addition product IV. Intermediate IV is then converted to (IA) as described in Scheme I.
  • Compounds of Formula (IB) wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen may be prepared by the procedure illustrated in Scheme IV (Method E):
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00055
  • In this method, a substituted phenol (XIV) is reacted with an acryloyl chloride bearing R2 and R3 (XV) in the presence of a suitable base such as triethylamine to provide an intermediate ester (not shown) which is cyclized in-situ by treatment with a Lewis acid, such as aluminum trichloride, in a suitable solvent such as carbon disulfide to provide lactone (XVI). The lactone is treated with a suitable amine HNR″R′″, such as morpholine, such that in the resulting amide (XVII), —NR″R′″ will function as a leaving group in the subsequent reaction. The intermediate phenol that forms (not shown) is protected, for example, by reaction in-situ with an alkyl halide RX (where R is alkyl and X is halogen), such as methyl iodide, in the presence of a suitable base such as potassium hydroxide to form the protected phenol in which the protecting group is an alkoxy group as shown in (XVII). The amide (XVII) is then reacted with an organometallic reagent (R8M), such as a Grignard reagent (M is MgBr or MgCl) or an organolithium reagent (M is Li), in a suitable solvent such as THF or diethyl ether to provide ketone (XVIII). Conversion of (XVIII) to a sulfinic acid amide using suitable conditions, for example as described in the second-to-last step in Scheme I, provides (XIX) (where R is alkyl). Reaction of (XIX) with R5R4M as described in the last step in Scheme I provides the desired compound of Formula (IB) where R1 is an optionally substituted alkoxyphenyl group.
  • In a more general procedure to prepare the formula (IB) compounds wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen, suitable for a variety of R1 groups, one may use a method analogous to that described in Scheme III. As illustrated in Scheme V (Method F) below, using a Weinreb amide bearing R8 (XXI) one may employ the method described in Scheme III to prepare the desired compound of Formula (IB).
    Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00056
  • Conventional techniques known to those skilled in the art can be used to prepare the substituted-amino compounds of Formulas (IA) and (IB), i.e. wherein R6 and/or R7 are other than hydrogen, from the corresponding unsubstituted-amino compounds wherein R6 and/or R7 are both hydrogen described above. For example, the unsubstituted-amino compounds of Formulas (IA) and (IB) may be N-alkylated using conventional techniques to prepare the corresponding N-alkylated compounds. In this approach, the nitrogen of compounds of Formula (IA) and (IB) undergoes reductive amination with aldehydes in suitable solvents, such as acetonitrile or 1,2-dichloroethane, and in the presence of suitable reducing agents, such as sodium cyanoborohydride or sodium triacetoxyborohydride, to give the corresponding tri- or di-substituted amine compound, respectively. In another example, the unsubstituted-amino compounds of Formula (IA) and (IB) may be N-acylated using conventional techniques to prepare the corresponding N-acylated compounds. In this method, compounds of Formula (IA) and (IB) undergo acylation with desired acid anhydrides upon heating in a suitable solvent, such as 1,2-dichloroethane, to give the corresponding N-mono-acylated product. Other known techniques may be used to prepare other substituted-amino derivatives of the compounds of Formulae (IA) and (IB) from the corresponding unsubstituted-amino compounds.
  • In order that this invention be more fully understood, the following examples are set forth. These examples are for the purpose of illustrating embodiments of this invention, and are not to be construed as limiting the scope of the invention in any way.
  • The examples which follow are illustrative and, as recognized by one skilled in the art, particular reagents or conditions could be modified as needed for individual compounds. Starting materials used in the scheme below are either commercially available or easily prepared from commercially available materials by those skilled in the art.
    • SYNTHETIC EXAMPLES Example 1 Synthesis of 2-methylpropane-2-sulfinic acid [3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethylbut-(Z)-ylidene]-amide (Methods A and B)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00057
  • To a mixture of 8.5 g (49.9 mmol) of ethyl trifluoromethylpyruvate, 6.6 g (120 mmol) of manganese, and 0.65 g (4.8 mmol) of zinc chloride in 40 mL of THF warmed at reflux, was added 200 microL (2 mmol) of 1-bromo-2-methylpropene. After 30 min, 9.13 mL (90.5 mmol) of 1-bromo-2-methylpropene in 30 mL of THF was added dropwise over a 1 hour period. The mixture was refluxed for 1 hour after the addition, and was then cooled to 0° C. and diluted with 150 mL of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride and 100 mL of EtOAc. The organic phase was separated and the aqueous layer extracted with three 100 mL portions of EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with two 50 mL portions of saturated aqueous ammonium chloride, two 50 mL portions of brine, dried over magnesium sulfate (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with EtOAc-hexane (5:95) to afford 5.9 g (52%) of 2-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethylpent-4-enoic acid ethyl ester.
  • To a mixture of 5.9 g (26.1 mmol) of the above 2-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethylpent-4-enoic acid ethyl ester in 30 mL of 4-fluoroanisole was added 5.2 g (39.4 mmol) of aluminum chloride in several portions. The mixture became exothermic and turned black with the first addition and was cooled with an ice-water bath. The mixture was stirred for 3 days and was then poured into 200 mL of ice-cold 1 N aqueous HCl and extracted with three 150 mL portions of EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with 50 mL of 1 N aqueous hydrochloric acid, three 50 mL portions of brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with EtOAc-hexane (1:9, then 2:8, then 3:7, then 4:6) to afford 6.6 g (71%) of 4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethylpentanoic acid ethyl ester.
  • To a chilled solution (ice-water bath) of 6 g (17.0 mmol) of the above 4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-2-hydroxy-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethylpentanoic acid ethyl ester in 60 mL of dry THF, 2.4 g (61.5 mmol) of lithium aluminum hydride was added in portions. After the addition, the cold bath was removed and the mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The mixture was then warmed at reflux for 3 hours and then cautiously quenched by slow addition to 100 mL of THF containing 2 mL of water. Additional water was then cautiously added for a total of 15 mL and the resulting mixture stirred for 2 hours. The excess water was dried with magnesium sulfate and 300 mL of EtOAc was added. After 1 hour, the mixture was filtered through diatomaceous earth and concentrated in vacuo to afford 4.9 g (92%) of 4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethylpentane-1,2-diol as an oil.
  • To a solution of 4.9 g (15.8 mmol) of the above 4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethylpentane-1,2-diol in 100 mL of MeOH was added 10 g (45.9 mmol) of sodium periodate. The mixture was stirred for 4 hours and was then diluted with 100 mL of ether and 100 mL of hexane, filtered through diatomaceous earth, and concentrated in vacuo. The crude residue was dissolved in hexane and passed through a pad of silica gel, eluting first with hexane then with EtOAc-hexane (2:98, then 4:96) to afford 3.85 g (87%) of 1,1,1-trifluoro-4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-4-methylpentan-2-one as a clear oil.
  • To a mixture of 500 mg (1.8 mmol) of 1,1,1-trifluoro-4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-4-methylpentan-2-one and 0.86 mL (3.6 mmol) of a solution of Ti(OEt)4 in EtOH (˜20% Ti) in 7 mL of THF was added 240 mg (2 mmol) t-butylsulfinamide. The reaction was warmed at reflux for 6 h and then cooled to room temperature, diluted with 1 mL of brine and EtOAc and filtered through diatomaceous earth and concentrated to afford an oil. The residue was absorbed onto silica gel and chromatographed on silica gel eluting with hexanes-EtOAc (98:2) to afford 300 mg (44%) of 2-methylpropane-2-sulfinic acid [3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethylbut-(Z)-ylidene]-amide as an orange oil.
  • Additional examples showing the preparation of particular intermediates useful in the synthetic methods of the present invention are shown in Examples 2 and 3 below:
    • Example 2 Synthesis of 2-hydroxy-4-methyl-4-phenyl-2-trifluoromethylpentanoic acid ethyl ester (Method C)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00058
  • To a room temperature solution of 45 mL (22.5 mmol) of a 0.5 M solution of 2-methyl-2-phenylpropylmagnesium chloride in diethyl ether was added 38 g (22.5 mmol) of ethyl trifluoropyruvate in 10 mL of anhydrous THF. The reaction became slightly warm to the touch and a white precipitate quickly developed. After 2 hours, the reaction was diluted with diethyl ether and quenched with 1 N aqueous HCl. The aqueous layer was separated and extracted with ether. The combined organic layers were dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford a brown oil. Chromatography on silica gel eluting with hexanes-EtOAc (98:2), afforded the title compound as a clear, colorless oil (4.6 g, 67%).
  • This intermediate may then be used as described in Example 1 and Scheme I of the General Synthetic Methods section to produce compounds of the invention.
    • Example 3 Synthesis of 1,1,1-trifluoro-4-(4-fluorophenyl)-4-methylpentan-2-one (Method D)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00059
  • To a mixture of 15.8 g of N,O-dimethylhydroxylamine hydrochloride and 21.7 mL of trifluoroacetic anhydride in 400 mL of CH2Cl2 was added 37 mL of pyridine dropwise at 0° C. The resulting mixture was allowed to stir at 0° C. for 30 min and then quenched with water. The organic layer was washed with water, 1 N HCl, water, and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residual colorless oil was placed under vacuum for 5 min, providing 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-methoxy-N-methylacetamide which was used for the next reaction without further purification.
  • A mixture of 3 g of the above 2,2,2-trifluoro-N-methoxy-N-methylacetamide in 30 mL of anhydrous ether was cooled to 0° C. and treated with 42 mL of 0.5 M solution of 2-methylpropenylmagnesium bromide in THF. The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min and then allowed to warm to room temperature. The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature overnight. The reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride (NH4Cl) and extracted with ether three times. The organic layers were combined and washed with water and brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, and filtered. The resulting ether/THF solution of 1,1,1-trifluoro-4-methylpent-3-en-2-one was used for the next reaction without further purification.
  • To a 2 M ether/THF solution of the above 1,1,1-trifluoro-4-methylpent-3-en-2-one was added 3.8 g of CuI and 10 mL of 2 M ether solution of 4-fluorophenylmagnesium bromide at 0° C. The mixture was warmed to room temperature and stirred for 2 hours. The reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc three times. The combined organic layers were washed with water, brine, dried over magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by flash chromatography to yield 460 mg of the title compound.
  • This intermediate may then be used as described in Example 1 and Scheme III of the General Synthetic Methods section to produce compounds of the invention.
    • Example 4 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine (Compound 1)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00060
  • To a chilled (−78 C) solution of 0.05 mL (0.514 mmol) of 2-methylpyridine in 3 mL of dry THF was added 0.23 mL (0.4 mmol) of a 1.7 M solution of t-BuLi in pentane. The mixture turned a bright orange. After 10 min, a solution of 98 mg (0.257 mmol) of 2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinic acid [3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-but-(Z)-ylidene]-amide in 0.5 mL of anhydrous THF was added. The reaction was then warmed to room temperature, quenched with aqueous ammonium chloride, stirred for 30 min and extracted with diethyl ether.(3×) The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 2 mL of methanol, 3 drops of concentrated HCl were added and the reaction was warmed at 75° C. in a sealed tube. After 1 h, the reaction was cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo, neutralized with aqueous sodium bicarbonate and extracted with EtOAc (3×). The combined organic layers were dried over (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated to afford an oil. The residue was purified by preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with hexanes-EtOAc (95:5) to afford 24 mg (25%) of the title compound.
    • Example 5 Synthesis of 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine (Compound 2)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00061
  • To a chilled (−78 C) solution of 40 mg (0.30 mmol) of 2-methylindole in 3 mL of diethyl ether was added 0.56 mL (0.91 mmol) of a 1.6 M solution of n-BuLi in hexanes. The resulting orange solution was stirred for 5 min and treated with 0.60 mL (0.60 mmol) of a solution of 1 M solution of KOt-Bu in THF. The reaction was slowly warmed until a bright yellow precipitate formed. After 5 min, the reaction mixture was cooled to −78° C. and treated with 138 mg (0.362 mmol) of a solution of 2-methyl-propane-2-sulfinic acid [3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-but-(Z)-ylidene]-amide in 0.5 mL of diethyl ether. Next, the mixture was warmed to room temperature, quenched with aqueous ammonium chloride and extracted with EtOAc (3×). The combined organic layers were dried over (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. The residue was dissolved in 2 mL of methanol, 3 drops of concentrated HCl were added and the reaction warmed at 75° C. in a sealed tube. After 1 h, the reaction was cooled to room temperature, concentrated in vacuo, neutralized with aqueous sodium bicarbonate and extracted with EtOAc (3×). The combined organic layers were dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated to leave an oil. The residue was purified by preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with toluene to afford an oil that had to be further purified by preparative thin layer chromatography eluting with hexanes-EtOAc (9:1) to afford 40 mg (33%) of the title compound.
    • Example 6 Synthesis of 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine (Compound 12)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00062
  • A solution of Lepidine (588 μL, 4.5 mmol) in THF (3 mL) was treated with LDA (1.5 M in cyclohexane, 3.0 mL) at −50° C. under N2 atmosphere. The reaction mixture was stirred at −50° C. for 30 min, cooled to −78° C., treated with a solution of 2-methylpropane-2-sulfinic acid [3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxyphenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethylbut(Z)-ylidine]-amide (565 mg, 1.5 mmol) in THF (4 mL) and stirred for 4 h. The mixture was quenched with water (8 mL) and diluted with EtOAc (20 mL). Phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (5×5 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered, concentrated and purified on SiO2 (60%-80% EtOAc: Hexanes). The product was dissolved in MeOH (4 mL), treated with HCl (4M in Dioxane, 4 eq.) and stirred for 4 h. The reaction was concentrated to an oil, redissolved in CHCl3 (20 mL) and quenched with NaHCO3 (sat. 20 mL). Phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CHCl3 (4×10 mL). Organic layers were pooled, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified on SiO2 (40%-60%, EtOAc/Hexane) to give 599.0 mg (96%) of the title product as an oil.
    • Example 7 Synthesis of [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-methyl-amine (Compound 24)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00063
  • A solution of 3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine (42.0 mg, 0.1 mmol) and formaldehyde (8 μL, 0.1 mmol) in dichloroethane (2 mL) was stirred for 30 min at room temperature in the presence of 4A molecular sieves (200 mg). The reaction mixture was acidified with acetic acid (57 μL, 1.0 mmol), stirred for 16 h and treated with sodium triacetoxy borohydride (42.4 mg, 0.2 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 3 h and quenched with NaHCO3 (sat. 6 mL). Phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CHCl3 (2×4 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified on SiO2 (20%-40%, EtOAc: Hexanes) to give 24.0 mg (55%) of the title compound.
    • Example 8 Synthesis of N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-acetamide (Compound 30)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00064
  • A solution of 3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine (42.0 mg, 0.1 mmol) in dichloroethane (4 mL) was treated with acetic anhydride (71 μL, 1.0 mmol). The mixture was stirred for 16 h at 85° C. and quenched with NaHCO3 (sat, 4 mL). Phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CHCl3 (3×2 mL). The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified on SiO2 (50%-70%, EtOAc: hexanes) to give 34.0 mg (74%) of the title product.
    • Example 9 Synthesis of [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-dimethyl-amine (Compound 29)
  • Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00065
  • A solution of 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine (42.0 mg, 0.1 mmol) and the formaldehyde (1.49 ml, 20 mmol) in acetonitrile (2 ml) was stirred for 30 minutes at room temperature. The reaction mixture was acidified with acetic acid (57 μL, 1.0 mmol) and treated with sodium cyanoborohydride (31.4 mg, 0.5 mmol). The resulting mixture was stirred at room temperature for 15 h and quenched with NaHCO3 (sat. 2 ml). Phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CHCl3 (3×2 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting oil was dissolved in Et2O and treated with HCl (2M in Ether) until the mixture was acidic (pH˜2). The ether layer was decanted and the salt was washed with ether (5×2 ml) and dried. The solid was dissolved in CHCl3, extracted with NaHCO3 (sat.), phases were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with CHCl3 (2×4 ml). The combined organic layers were dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified on SiO2 (20%-30%, EtOAc: Hexanes) to give 12.5 mg (28%) of the title compound.
  • Compounds nos. 3 to 11, 13 to 23, 25 to 29 and 31 to 48, set forth in the tables above, may be made by the procedures described in the General Synthetic Methods section and Examples 1-9.
  • Assessment of Biological Properties
  • Compounds of the invention were evaluated for binding to the steroid receptor by a fluorescence polarization competitive binding assay. Detailed descriptions for preparation of recombinant glucocorticoid receptor (GR) complex used in the assay is described in Goldrick et al., U.S. provisional application No. 60/291,877, filed May 18, 2001 (corresponding to Goldrick et al., U.S. nonprovisional application Ser. No. 10/151,133, filed May 20, 2002, Attny. Docket No. 9/205) both incorporated herein by reference in their entirety. Preparation of the tetramethyl rhodamine (TAMRA)-labeled dexamethasone probe was accomplished using a standard literature procedure (M. Pons et al., J. Steroid Biochem., 1985, 22, pp. 267-273).
  • A. Glucocorticoid Receptor Competitive Binding Assay
  • Step 1. Characterization of the Fluorescent Probe
  • The wavelengths for maximum excitation and emission of the fluorescent probe should first be measured. An example of such a probe is rhodamine (TAMRA)-labeled dexamethasone.
  • The affinity of the probe for the steroid receptor was then determined in a titration experiment. The fluorescence polarization value of the probe in assay buffer was measured on an SLM-8100 fluorometer using the excitation and emission maximum values described above. Aliquots of expression vector lysate were added and fluorescence polarization was measured after each addition until no further change in polarization value was observed. Non-linear least squares regression analysis was used to calculate the dissociation constant of the probe from the polarization values obtained for lysate binding to the probe.
  • Step 2. Screening for Inhibitors of Probe Binding
  • This assay uses fluorescence polarization (FP) to quantitate the ability of test compounds to compete with tetramethyl rhodamine (TAMRA)-labeled dexamethasone for binding to a human glucocorticoid receptor (GR) complex prepared from an insect expression system. The assay buffer was: 10 mM TES, 50 mM KCl, 20 mM Na2MoO4.2H2O, 1.5 mM EDTA, 0.04% w/v CHAPS, 10% v/v glycerol, 1 mM dithiothreitol, pH 7.4. Test compounds were dissolved to 1 mM in neat DMSO and then further diluted to 10× assay concentration in assay buffer supplemented with 10% v/v DMSO. Test compounds were serially diluted at 10× assay concentrations in 10% DMSO-containing buffer in 96-well polypropylene plates. Binding reaction mixtures were prepared in 96-well black Dynex microtiter plates by sequential addition of the following assay components to each well: 15 μL of 10× test compound solution, 85 μL of GR-containing baculovirus lysate diluted 1:170 in assay buffer, and 50 μL of 15 nM TAMRA-labeled dexamethasone. Positive controls were reaction mixtures containing no test compound; negative controls (blanks) were reaction mixtures containing 0.7 μM to 2 μM dexamethasone. The binding reactions were incubated for 1 hour at room temperature and then read for fluorescence polarization in the LJL Analyst set to 550 nm excitation and 580 nm emission, with the Rhodamine 561 dichroic mirror installed. IC50 values were determined by iterative non-linear curve fitting of the FP signal data to a 4-parameter logistic equation.
  • Compounds found to bind to the glucocorticoid receptor may be evaluated for binding to the progesterone receptor (PR), estrogen receptor (ER), and mineralocorticoid receptors to evaluate the compound's selectivity for GR. The protocols for PR and MR are identical to the above GR method, with the following exceptions: PR insect cell lysate is diluted 1:7.1 and MR lysate diluted 1:9.4. PR probe is TAMRA-labeled mifepristone, used at a final concentration of 5 nM in the assay, and the negative controls (blanks) were reactions containing mifepristone at 0.7 μM to 2 μM.
  • The ER protocol is similar to the above protocols, but uses PanVera kit receptor, fluorescein-labeled probe. The assay components are made in the same volumes as above, to produce final assay concentrations for ER of 15 nM and ES2 probe of 1 nM. In addition, the component order of addition is modified from the above assays: probe is added to the plate first, followed by receptor and test compound. The plates are read in the LJL Analyst set to 485 nm excitation and 530 nm emission, with the Fluorescein 505 dichroic mirror installed.
  • Compounds found to bind to the glucocorticoid receptor may be evaluated for dissociation of transactivation and transrepression by assays cited in the Background of the Invention (C. M. Bamberger and H. M. Schulte, Eur. J. Clin. Invest., 2000, 30 (suppl. 3) 6-9) or by the assays described below.
  • B. Glucocorticoid Receptor Cell Assays
  • 1. Induction of Aromatase in Fibroblasts (Cell Assay for Transactivation)
  • Dexamethasone, a synthetic ligand to the glucocorticoid receptor (GR), induces expression of aromatase in human foreskin fibroblast cells. The activity of aromatase is measured by the conversion of testosterone to estradiol in culture media. Compounds that exhibit binding to GR are evaluated for their ability to induce aromatase activity in human foreskin fibroblasts.
  • Human foreskin fibroblast cells (ATCC Cat. No. CRL-2429, designation CCD112SK) are plated on 96 well plates at 50,000 cells per well 5 days before use, in Iscove's Modified Dulbecco's Media (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat No. 12440-053) supplemented with 10% charcoal filtered FBS (Clonetech Cat No. SH30068) and Gentamycin (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat. No. 15710-064). On the day of the experiment, the media in the wells is replaced with fresh media. Cells are treated with test compounds to final concentrations of 10−5 M to 10−8 M, and testosterone to a final concentration of 300 ng/mL. Each well has a total volume of 100 μL. Samples are made in duplicates. Control wells include: (a) wells that receive testosterone only, and) wells that receive testosterone plus 2 μM of dexamethasone to provide maximum induction of aromatase. Plates are incubated at 37° C. overnight (15 to 18 hours), and supernatants are harvested at the end of incubation. Estradiol in the supernatant is measured using ELISA kits for estradiol (made by ALPCO, obtained from American Laboratory Products Cat. No. 020-DR-2693) according to the manufacture's instruction. The amount of estradiol is inversely proportional to the ELISA signals in each well. The extent of aromatase induction by test compounds is expressed as a relative percentage to dexamethasone. EC50 values of test compounds are derived by non-linear curve fitting.
  • 2. Inhibition of IL-6 Production in Fibroblasts (Cell Assay for Transrepression)
  • Human foreskin fibroblast cells produce IL-6 in response to stimulation by proinflammatory cytokine IL-1. This inflammatory response, as measured by the production of IL-6, can be effectively inhibited by dexamethasone, a synthetic ligand to the glucocorticoid receptor (GR). Compounds that exhibit binding to GR are evaluated for their ability to inhibit IL-6 production in human foreskin fibroblasts.
  • Human foreskin fibroblast cells (ATCC Cat. No. CRL-2429) are plated on 96 well plates at 5,000 cells per well the day before use, in Iscove's Modified Dulbecco's Media (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat. No. 12440-053) supplemented with 10% charcoal filtered FBS (Clonetech Cat. No. SH30068) and Gentamycin (GibcoBRL Life Technologies Cat. No. 15710-064). On the next day, media in the wells is replaced with fresh media. Cells are treated with IL-1 (rhIL-1α, R&D Systems Cat. No. 200-LA) to a final concentration of 1 ng/mL, and with test compounds to final concentrations of 10−5 M to 10−8 M, in a total volume of 200 μL per well. Samples are done in duplicates. Background control wells do not receive test compounds or IL-1. Positive control wells receive IL-1 only and represent maximum (or 100%) amount of IL-6 production. Plates are incubated at 37° C. overnight (15 to 18 hours), and supernatants are harvested at the end of incubation. IL-6 levels in the supernatants are determined by the ELISA kits for IL-6 (MedSystems Diagnostics GmbH, Vienna, Austria, Cat. No. BMS213TEN) according to manufacture's instructions. The extent of inhibition of IL-6 by test compounds is expressed in percentage relative to positive controls. IC50 values of test compounds are derived by non-linear curve fitting.
  • Evaluation of agonist or antagonist activity of compounds binding to the glucocorticoid receptor may be determined by any of the assays.
  • 3. Modulation of Tyrosine Aminotransferase (TAT) Induction in Rat Hepatoma Cells
  • Testing of compounds for agonist or antagonist activity in induction of tyrosine aminotransferase (TAT) in rat hepatoma cells. H4-II-E-C3 cells were incubated overnight in 96 well plates (20,000 cells/100 μL/well) in MEM medium containing 10% heat inactivated FBS and 1% nonessential amino acids. On the next day, cells were stimulated with the indicated concentrations of dexamethasone or test compound (dissolved in DMSO, final DMSO concentration 0.2%) for 18 hours. Control cells were treated with 0.2% DMSO. After 18 hours, the cells were lysed in a buffer containing 0.1% Triton X-100 and the TAT activity was measured in a photometric assay using tyrosine and alpha-ketoglutarate as substrates.
  • For measuring antagonist activity, the hepatoma cells were pre-stimulated by addition of dexamethasone (concentration ranges from 3×10−9 M to 3×10−8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells. The steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • 4. Modulation of MMTV-Luc Induction in HeLa Cells
  • Testing of compounds for agonist or antagonist activity in stimulation of MMTV-(mouse mammary tumor virus) promoter in HeLa cells.
  • HeLa cells were stably co-transfected with the pHHLuc-plasmid containing a fragment of the MMTV-LTR (−200 to +100 relative to the transcription start site) cloned in front of the luciferase gene (Norden, 1988) and the pcDNA3.1 plasmid (Invitrogen) constitutively expressing the resistance for the selective antibiotic GENETICIN®. Clones with best induction of the MMTV-promoter were selected and used for further experiments.
  • Cells were cultured overnight in DMEM medium without phenol red, supplemented with 3% CCS (charcoal treated calf serum) and then transferred to 96 well plates (15,000 cells/100 μL/well). On the next day, activation of the MMTV-promoter was stimulated by addition of test compound or dexamethasone dissolved in DMSO (final concentration 0.2%). Control cells were treated with DMSO only. After 18 hours, the cells were lysed with cell lysis reagent (Promega, Cat. No. E1531), luciferase assay reagent (Promega, Cat. No. E1501) was added and the glow luminescence was measured using a luminometer (BMG, Offenburg).
  • For measuring antagonist activity, the MMTV-promoter was pre-stimulated by adding dexamethasone (3×10−9 M to 3×10−8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells. The steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • 5. Modulation of IL-8 Production in U937 Cells
  • Testing of compounds for agonist or antagonist activity in GR-mediated inhibition of LPS-induced IL-8 secretion in U-937 cells.
  • U-937 cells were incubated for 2 to 4 days in RPMI1640 medium containing 10% CCS (charcoal treated calf serum). The cells were transferred to 96 well plates (40,000 cells/100 μL/well) and stimulated with 1 μg/mL LPS (dissolved in PBS) in the presence or absence of dexamethasone or test compound (dissolved in DMSO, final concentration 0.2%). Control cells were treated with 0.2% DMSO. After 18 hours, the IL-8 concentration in the cell supernatant was measured by ELISA, using the “OptEIA human IL-8 set” (Pharmingen, Cat. No. 2654KI).
  • For measuring antagonist activity, the LPS-induced IL-8 secretion was inhibited by adding dexamethasone (3×10−9 M to 3×10−8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells. The steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • 6. Modulation of ICAM-Luc Expression in HeLa Cells
  • Testing of compounds for agonist or antagonist activity in inhibition of TNF-alpha-induced activation of the ICAM-promoter in HeLa cells.
  • HeLa cells were stably co-transfected with a plasmid containing a 1.3 kb fragment of the human ICAM-promoter (−1353 to −9 relative to the transcription start site, Ledebur and Parks, 1995) cloned in front of the luciferase gene and the pcDNA3.1 plasmid (Invitrogen) which constitutively expresses the resistance for the antibiotic GENETICIN®. Clones with best induction of the ICAM-promoter were selected and used for further experiments. Cells were transferred to 96 well plates (15,000 cells/100 μL/well) in DMEM medium supplemented with 3% CCS. On the following day the activation of the ICAM-promoter was induced by addition of 10 ng/mL recombinant TNF-alpha (R&D System, Cat. No. 210-TA). Simultaneously the cells were treated with the test compound or dexamethasone (dissolved in DMSO, final concentration 0.2%). Control cells were treated with DMSO only. After 18 hours, the cells were lysed with cell lysis reagent (Promega, Cat. No. E1531), luciferase assay reagent (Promega, Cat. No. E1501) was added and glow luminescence was measured using a luminometer (BMG, Offenburg).
  • For measuring antagonist activity, the TNF-alpha-induced activation of the ICAM-promoter was inhibited by adding dexamethasone (3×10−9 M to 3×10−8 M) shortly before the test compound was applied to the cells. The steroidal non-selective GR/PR antagonist mifepristone was used as control.
  • In general, the preferred potency range in the above assays is between 0.1 nM and 10 μM, the more preferred potency range is 0.1 nM to 1 μM, and the most preferred potency range is 0.1 nM to 100 nM.
  • Representative compounds of the invention have been tested and have shown activity as modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor function in one or more of the above assays. For example, the following compounds of Formula (IA) have demonstrated activity in the GR binding assay:
    • 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
    • 3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
    • [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-isobutyl-amine;
    • [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-propyl-amine;
    • Butyl-[3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-amine; and
    • [3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-methyl-amine.
  • The invention also provides methods of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient comprising administering to the patient a compound according to the invention. If the purpose of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient is to treat a disease-state or condition, the administration preferably comprises a therapeutically or pharmaceutically effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to the invention. If the purpose of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient is for a diagnostic or other purpose (e.g., to determine the patient's suitability for therapy or sensitivity to various sub-therapeutic doses of the compounds according to the invention), the administration preferably comprises an effective amount of a compound according to the invention, that is, the amount necessary to obtain the desired effect or degree of modulation.
  • Methods of Therapeutic Use
  • As pointed out above, the compounds of the invention are useful in modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function. In doing so, these compounds have therapeutic use in treating disease-states and conditions mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function or that would benefit from modulation of the glucocorticoid receptor function.
  • As the compounds of the invention modulate the glucocorticoid receptor function, they have very useful anti-inflammatory and antiallergic, immune-suppressive, and anti-proliferative activity and they can be used in patients as drugs, particularly in the form of pharmaceutical compositions as set forth below, for the treatment of disease-states and conditions.
  • The agonist compounds according to the invention can be used in patients as drugs for the treatment of the following disease-states or indications that are accompanied by inflammatory, allergic, and/or proliferative processes:
    • (i) Lung diseases: chronic, obstructive lung diseases of any genesis, particularly bronchial asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD); adult respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS); bronchiectasis; bronchitis of various genesis; all forms of restrictive lung diseases, particularly allergic alveolitis; all forms of lung edema, particularly toxic lung edema; all forms of interstitial lung diseases of any genesis, e.g., radiation pneumonitis; and sarcoidosis and granulomatoses, particularly Boeck disease;
    • (ii) Rheumatic diseases or autoimmune diseases or joint diseases: all forms of rheumatic diseases, especially rheumatoid arthritis, acute rheumatic fever, and polymyalgia rheumatica; reactive arthritis; rheumatic soft tissue diseases; inflammatory soft tissue diseases of other genesis; arthritic symptoms in degenerative joint diseases (arthroses); traumatic arthritis; collagenoses of any genesis, e.g., systemic lupus erythematosus, scleroderma, polymyositis, dermatomyositis, Sjögren syndrome, Still disease, and Felty syndrome;
    • (iii) Allergic diseases: all forms of allergic reactions, e.g., angioneurotic edema, hay fever, insect bites, allergic reactions to drugs, blood derivatives, contrast agents, etc., anaphylactic shock (anaphylaxis), urticaria, angioneurotic edema, and contact dermatitis;
    • (iv) Vasculitis diseases: panarteritis nodosa, polyarteritis nodosa, arteritis temporalis, Wegner granulomatosis, giant cell arthritis, and erythema nodosum;
    • (v) Dermatological diseases: atopic dermatitis, particularly in children; psoriasis; pityriasis rubra pilaris; erythematous diseases triggered by various noxa, e.g., rays, chemicals, burns, etc.; bullous dermatoses; diseases of the lichenoid complex; pruritus (e.g., of allergic genesis); seborrheic dermatitis; rosacea; pemphigus vulgaris; erythema multiforme exudativum; balanitis; vulvitis; hair loss, such as occurs in alopecia greata; and cutaneous T cell lymphomas;
    • (vi) Renal diseases: nephrotic syndrome; and all types of nephritis, e.g., glomerulonephritis;
    • (vii) Hepatic diseases: acute liver cell disintegration; acute hepatitis of various genesis, e.g., viral, toxic, drug-induced; and chronically aggressive and/or chronically intermittent hepatitis;
    • (viii) Gastrointestinal diseases: inflammatory bowel diseases, e.g., regional enteritis (Crohn disease), colitis ulcerosa; gastritis; peptic esophagitis (refluxoesophagitis); and gastroenteritis of other genesis, e.g., nontropical sprue;
    • (ix) Proctological diseases: anal eczema; fissures; hemorrhoids; and idiopathic proctitis;
    • (x) Eye diseases: allergic keratitis, uveitis, or iritis; conjunctivitis; blepharitis; neuritis nervi optici; choroiditis; and sympathetic ophthalmia;
    • (xi) Diseases of the ear, nose, and throat (ENT) area: allergic rhinitis or hay fever; otitis externa, e.g., caused by contact eczema, infection, etc.; and otitis media;
    • (xii) Neurological diseases: brain edema, particularly tumor-related brain edema; multiple sclerosis; acute encephalomyelitis; meningitis; acute spinal cord injury; stroke; and various forms of seizures, e.g., nodding spasms;
    • (xiii) Blood diseases: acquired hemolytic anemia; and idiopathic thrombocytopenia;
    • (xiv) Tumor diseases: acute lymphatic leukemia; malignant lymphoma; lymphogranulomatoses; lymphosarcoma; extensive metastases, particularly in mammary, bronchial, and prostatic carcinoma;
    • (xv) Endocrine diseases: endocrine ophthalmopathy; endocrine orbitopathia; thyrotoxic crisis; Thyroiditis de Quervain; Hashimoto thyroiditis; Morbus Basedow; granulomatous thyroiditis; struma lymphomatosa; and Grave disease;
    • (xvi) Organ and tissue transplantations and graft-versus-host diseases;
    • (xvii) Severe states of shock, e.g., septic shock, anaphylactic shock, and systemic inflammatory response syndrome (SIRS);
    • (xviii) Substitution therapy in: congenital primary adrenal insufficiency, e.g., adrenogenital syndrome; acquired primary adrenal insufficiency, e.g., Addison disease, autoimmune adrenalitis, post-infection, tumors, metastases, etc.; congenital secondary adrenal insufficiency, e.g., congenital hypopituitarism; and acquired secondary adrenal insufficiency, e.g., post-infection, tumors, metastases, etc.;
    • (xix) Pain of inflammatory genesis, e.g., lumbago; and
    • (xx) various other disease-states or conditions including type I diabetes (insulin-dependent diabetes), osteoarthritis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, restenosis following percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, Alzheimer disease, acute and chronic pain, atherosclerosis, reperfusion injury, bone resorption diseases, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, thermal injury, multiple organ injury secondary to trauma, acute purulent meningitis, necrotizing enterocolitis and syndromes associated with hemodialysis, leukopheresis, and granulocyte transfusion.
  • In addition, the compounds according to the invention can be used for the treatment of any other disease-states or conditions not mentioned above which have been treated, are treated, or will be treated with synthetic glucocorticoids (see, e.g., H. J. Hatz, Glucocorticoide: Immunologische Grundlagen, Pharmakologie und Therapierichtlinien [Glucocorticoids: Immunological Fundamentals, Pharmacology, and Therapeutic Guidelines], Stuttgart: Verlagsgesellschaft mbH, 1998, which is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety). Most or all of the indications (i) through (xx) mentioned above are described in detail in H. J. Hatz, Glucocorticoide: Immunologische Grundlagen, Pharmakologie und Therapierichtlinien. Furthermore, the compounds of the invention can also be used to treat disorders other than those listed above or mentioned or discussed herein, including in the Background of the Invention.
  • The antagonist compounds according to the invention, whether full antagonists or partial antagonists, can be used in patients as drugs for the treatment of the following disease-states or indications, without limitation: type II diabetes (non-insulin-dependent diabetes); obesity; cardiovascular diseases; hypertension; arteriosclerosis; neurological diseases, such as psychosis and depression; adrenal and pituitary tumors; glaucoma; and Cushing syndrome based on an ACTH-secreting tumor like pituitary adenoma. In particular, the compounds of the invention are useful for treating obesity and all disease-states and indications related to a deregulated fatty acids metabolism such as hypertension, atherosclerosis, and other cardiovascular diseases. Using the compounds of the invention that are GR antagonists, it should be possible to antagonize both the carbohydrate metabolism and fatty acids metabolism. Thus, the antagonist compounds of the invention are useful in treating all disease-states and conditions that involve increased carbohydrate, protein, and lipid metabolism and would include disease-states and conditions leading to catabolism like muscle frailty (as an example of protein metabolism).
  • Methods of Diagnostic Use
  • The compounds of the invention may also be used in diagnostic applications and for commercial and other purposes as standards in competitive binding assays. In such uses, the compounds of the invention may be used in the form of the compounds themselves or they may be modified by attaching a radioisotope, luminescence, fluorescent label or the like in order to obtain a radioisotope, luminescence, or fluorescent probe, as would be known by one of skill in the art and as outlined in Handbook of Fluorescent Probes and Research Chemicals, 6th Edition, R. P. Haugland (ed.), Eugene: Molecular Probes, 1996; Fluorescence and Luminescence Probes for Biological Activity, W. T. Mason (ed.), San Diego: Academic Press, 1993; Receptor-Ligand Interaction A Practical Approach, E. C. Hulme (ed.), Oxford: IRL Press, 1992, each of which is hereby incorporated by reference in their entireties.
  • General Administration and Pharmaceutical Compositions
  • When used as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of the invention are typically administered in the form of a pharmaceutical composition. Such compositions can be prepared using procedures well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one compound of the invention. The compounds of the invention may also be administered alone or in combination with adjuvants that enhance stability of the compounds of the invention, facilitate administration of pharmaceutical compositions containing them in certain embodiments, provide increased dissolution or dispersion, increased inhibitory activity, provide adjunct therapy, and the like. The compounds according to the invention may be used on their own or in conjunction with other active substances according to the invention, optionally also in conjunction with other pharmacologically active substances. In general, the compounds of this invention are administered in a therapeutically or pharmaceutically effective amount, but may be administered in lower amounts for diagnostic or other purposes.
  • In particular, the compounds of the invention are useful in combination with glucocorticoids or corticosteroids. As pointed out above, standard therapy for a variety of immune and inflammatory disorders includes administration of corticosteroids, which have the ability to suppress immunologic and inflammatory responses. (A. P. Truhan et al., Annals of Allergy, 1989, 62, pp. 375-391; J. D. Baxter, Hospital Practice, 1992, 27, pp. 111-134; R. P. Kimberly, Curr. Opin. Rheumatol., 1992, 4, pp. 325-331; M. H. Weisman, Curr. Opin. Rheumatol., 1995, 7, pp. 183-190; W. Sterry, Arch. Dermatol. Res., 1992, 284 (Suppl.), pp. S27-S29). While therapeutically beneficial, however, the use of corticosteroids is associated with a number of side effects, ranging from mild to possibly life threatening, especially with prolonged and/or high dose steroid usage. Accordingly, methods and compositions that enable the use of a lower effective dosage of corticosteroids (referred to as the “steroid sparing effect”) would be highly desirable to avoid unwanted side effects. The compounds of the invention provide such a steroid sparing effect by achieving the desired therapeutic effect while allowing the use of lower doses and less frequent administration of glucocorticoids or corticosteroids.
  • Administration of the compounds of the invention, in pure form or in an appropriate pharmaceutical composition, can be carried out using any of the accepted modes of administration of pharmaceutical compositions. Thus, administration can be, for example, orally, buccally (e.g., sublingually), nasally, parenterally, topically, transdermally, vaginally, or rectally, in the form of solid, semi-solid, lyophilized powder, or liquid dosage forms, such as, for example, tablets, suppositories, pills, soft elastic and hard gelatin capsules, powders, solutions, suspensions, or aerosols, or the like, preferably in unit dosage forms suitable for simple administration of precise dosages. The pharmaceutical compositions will generally include a conventional pharmaceutical carrier or excipient and a compound of the invention as the/an active agent, and, in addition, may include other medicinal agents, pharmaceutical agents, carriers, adjuvants, diluents, vehicles, or combinations thereof. Such pharmaceutically acceptable excipients, carriers, or additives as well as methods of making pharmaceutical compositions for various modes or administration are well-known to those of skill in the art. The state of the art is evidenced, e.g., by Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, A. Gennaro (ed.), Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2000; Handbook of Pharmaceutical Additives, Michael & Irene Ash (eds.), Gower, 1995; Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, A. H. Kibbe (ed.), American Pharmaceutical Ass'n, 2000; H. C. Ansel and N. G. Popovish, Pharmaceutical Dosage Forms and Drug Delivery Systems, 5th ed., Lea and Febiger, 1990; each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties to better describe the state of the art.
  • As one of skill in the art would expect, the forms of the compounds of the invention utilized in a particular pharmaceutical formulation will be selected (e.g., salts) that possess suitable physical characteristics (e.g., water solubility) that is required for the formulation to be efficacious.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for buccal (sub-lingual) administration include lozenges comprising a compound of the present invention in a flavored base, usually sucrose, and acacia or tragacanth, and pastilles comprising the compound in an inert base such as gelatin and glycerin or sucrose and acacia.
  • Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for parenteral administration comprise sterile aqueous preparations of a compound of the present invention. These preparations are preferably administered intravenously, although administration can also be effected by means of subcutaneous, intramuscular, or intradermal injection. Injectable pharmaceutical formulations are commonly based upon injectable sterile saline, phosphate-buffered saline, oleaginous suspensions, or other injectable carriers known in the art and are generally rendered sterile and isotonic with the blood. The injectable pharmaceutical formulations may therefore be provided as a sterile injectable solution or suspension in a nontoxic parenterally acceptable diluent or solvent, including 1,3-butanediol, water, Ringer's solution, isotonic sodium chloride solution, fixed oils such as synthetic mono- or diglycerides, fatty acids such as oleic acid, and the like. Such injectable pharmaceutical formulations are formulated according to the known art using suitable dispersing or setting agents and suspending agents. Injectable compositions will generally contain from 0.1 to 5% w/w of a compound of the invention.
  • Solid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds include capsules, tablets, pills, powders, and granules. For such oral administration, a pharmaceutically acceptable composition containing a compound(s) of the invention is formed by the incorporation of any of the normally employed excipients, such as, for example, pharmaceutical grades of mannitol, lactose, starch, pregelatinized starch, magnesium stearate, sodium saccharine, talcum, cellulose ether derivatives, glucose, gelatin, sucrose, citrate, propyl gallate, and the like. Such solid pharmaceutical formulations may include formulations, as are well known in the art, to provide prolonged or sustained delivery of the drug to the gastrointestinal tract by any number of mechanisms, which include, but are not limited to, pH sensitive release from the dosage form based on the changing pH of the small intestine, slow erosion of a tablet or capsule, retention in the stomach based on the physical properties of the formulation, bioadhesion of the dosage form to the mucosal lining of the intestinal tract, or enzymatic release of the active drug from the dosage form.
  • Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds include emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups, and elixirs, optionally containing pharmaceutical adjuvants in a carrier, such as, for example, water, saline, aqueous dextrose, glycerol, ethanol and the like. These compositions can also contain additional adjuvants such as wetting, emulsifying, suspending, sweetening, flavoring, and perfuming agents.
  • Topical dosage forms of the compounds include ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, powders, solutions, sprays, inhalants, eye ointments, eye or ear drops, impregnated dressings and aerosols, and may contain appropriate conventional additives such as preservatives, solvents to assist drug penetration and emollients in ointments and creams. Topical application may be once or more than once per day depending upon the usual medical considerations. Furthermore, preferred compounds for the present invention can be administered in intranasal form via topical use of suitable intranasal vehicles. The formulations may also contain compatible conventional carriers, such as cream or ointment bases and ethanol or oleyl alcohol for lotions. Such carriers may be present as from about 1% up to about 98% of the formulation, more usually they will form up to about 80% of the formulation.
  • Transdermal administration is also possible. Pharmaceutical compositions suitable for transdermal administration can be presented as discrete patches adapted to remain in intimate contact with the epidermis of the recipient for a prolonged period of time. To be administered in the form of a transdermal delivery system, the dosage administration will, of course, be continuous rather than intermittent throughout the dosage regimen. Such patches suitably contain a compound of the invention in an optionally buffered, aqueous solution, dissolved and/or dispersed in an adhesive, or dispersed in a polymer. A suitable concentration of the active compound is about 1% to 35%, preferably about 3% to 15%.
  • For administration by inhalation, the compounds of the invention are conveniently delivered in the form of an aerosol spray from a pump spray device not requiring a propellant gas or from a pressurized pack or a nebulizer with the use of a suitable propellant, e.g., dichlorodifluoromethane, trichlorofluoromethane, dichlorotetrafluoroethane, tetrafluoroethane, heptafluoropropane, carbon dioxide, or other suitable gas. In any case, the aerosol spray dosage unit may be determined by providing a valve to deliver a metered amount so that the resulting metered dose inhaler (MDI) is used to administer the compounds of the invention in a reproducible and controlled way. Such inhaler, nebulizer, or atomizer devices are known in the art, for example, in PCT International Publication Nos. WO 97/12687 (particularly FIG. 6 thereof, which is the basis for the commercial RESPIMAT® nebulizer); WO 94/07607; WO 97/12683; and WO 97/20590, to which reference is hereby made and each of which is incorporated herein by reference in their entireties.
  • Rectal administration can be effected utilizing unit dose suppositories in which the compound is admixed with low-melting water-soluble or insoluble solids such as fats, cocoa butter, glycerinated gelatin, hydrogenated vegetable oils, mixtures of polyethylene glycols of various molecular weights, or fatty acid esters of polyethylene glycols, or the like. The active compound is usually a minor component, often from about 0.05 to 10% by weight, with the remainder being the base component.
  • In all of the above pharmaceutical compositions, the compounds of the invention are formulated with an acceptable carrier or excipient. The carriers or excipients used must, of course, be acceptable in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the composition and must not be deleterious to the patient. The carrier or excipient can be a solid or a liquid, or both, and is preferably formulated with the compound of the invention as a unit-dose composition, for example, a tablet, which can contain from 0.05% to 95% by weight of the active compound. Such carriers or excipients include inert fillers or diluents, binders, lubricants, disintegrating agents, solution retardants, resorption accelerators, absorption agents, and coloring agents. Suitable binders include starch, gelatin, natural sugars such as glucose or β-lactose, corn sweeteners, natural and synthetic gums such as acacia, tragacanth or sodium alginate, carboxymethylcellulose, polyethylene glycol, waxes, and the like. Lubricants include sodium oleate, sodium stearate, magnesium stearate, sodium benzoate, sodium acetate, sodium chloride, and the like. Disintegrators include starch, methyl cellulose, agar, bentonite, xanthan gum, and the like.
  • Generally, a therapeutically effective daily dose is from about 0.001 mg to about 15 mg/kg of body weight per day of a compound of the invention; preferably, from about 0.1 mg to about 10 mg/kg of body weight per day; and most preferably, from about 0.1 mg to about 1.5 mg/kg of body weight per day. For example, for administration to a 70 kg person, the dosage range would be from about 0.07 mg to about 1050 mg per day of a compound of the invention, preferably from about 7.0 mg to about 700 mg per day, and most preferably from about 7.0 mg to about 105 mg per day. Some degree of routine dose optimization may be required to determine an optimal dosing level and pattern.
  • Pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and excipients encompass all the foregoing additives and the like.
    • EXAMPLES OF PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS
  • A. TABLETS
    Component Amount per tablet (mg)
    active substance 100
    lactose 140
    corn starch 240
    polyvinylpyrrolidone 15
    magnesium stearate 5
    TOTAL 500
  • The finely ground active substance, lactose, and some of the corn starch are mixed together. The mixture is screened, then moistened with a solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone in water, kneaded, wet-granulated and dried. The granules, the remaining corn starch and the magnesium stearate are screened and mixed together. The mixture is compressed to produce tablets of suitable shape and size.
    B. TABLETS
    Component Amount per tablet (mg)
    active substance 80
    lactose 55
    corn starch 190
    polyvinylpyrrolidone 15
    magnesium stearate 2
    microcrystalline cellulose 35
    sodium-carboxymethyl starch 23
    TOTAL 400
  • The finely ground active substance, some of the corn starch, lactose, microcrystalline cellulose, and polyvinylpyrrolidone are mixed together, the mixture is screened and worked with the remaining corn starch and water to form a granulate which is dried and screened. The sodium-carboxymethyl starch and the magnesium stearate are added and mixed in and the mixture is compressed to form tablets of a suitable size.
    C. COATED TABLETS
    Component Amount per tablet (mg)
    active substance 5
    lactose 30
    corn starch 41.5
    polyvinylpyrrolidone 3
    magnesium stearate 0.5
    TOTAL 90
  • The active substance, corn starch, lactose, and polyvinylpyrrolidone are thoroughly mixed and moistened with water. The moist mass is pushed through a screen with a 1 mm mesh size, dried at about 45° C. and the granules are then passed through the same screen. After the magnesium stearate has been mixed in, convex tablet cores with a diameter of 6 mm are compressed in a tablet-making machine. The tablet cores thus produced are coated in known manner with a covering consisting essentially of sugar and talc. The finished coated tablets are polished with wax.
    D. CAPSULES
    Component Amount per capsule (mg)
    active substance 50
    corn starch 268.5
    magnesium stearate 1.5
    TOTAL 320
  • The substance and corn starch are mixed and moistened with water. The moist mass is screened and dried. The dry granules are screened and mixed with magnesium stearate. The finished mixture is packed into size 1 hard gelatine capsules.
    E. AMPOULE SOLUTION
    Component Amount per ampoule
    active substance 50 mg
    sodium chloride 50 mg
    water for inj. 5 mL
  • The active substance is dissolved in water at its own pH or optionally at pH 5.5 to 6.5 and sodium chloride is added to make it isotonic. The solution obtained is filtered free from pyrogens and the filtrate is transferred under aseptic conditions into ampoules which are then sterilized and sealed by fusion. The ampoules contain 5 mg, 25 mg, and 50 mg of active substance.
    F. SUPPOSITORIES
    Component Amount per suppository (mg)
    active substance 50
    solid fat 1650
    TOTAL 1700
  • The hard fat is melted. At 40° C., the ground active substance is homogeneously dispersed therein. The mixture is cooled to 38° C. and poured into slightly chilled suppository molds.
    G. METERING AEROSOL
    Component Amount
    active substance 0.005
    sorbitan trioleate 0.1 
    monofluorotrichloromethane and to 100
    difluorodichloromethane (2:3)
  • The suspension is transferred into a conventional aerosol container with a metering valve. Preferably, 50 μL of suspension are delivered per spray. The active substance may also be metered in higher doses if desired (e.g., 0.02% by weight).
    Component Amount
    H. POWDER FOR INHALATION
    active substance 1.0 mg
    lactose monohydrate to 25 mg
    I. POWDER FOR INHALATION
    active substance 2.0 mg
    lactose monohydrate to 25 mg
    J. POWDER FOR INHALATION
    active substance 1.0 mg
    lactose monohydrate to 5 mg
    K. POWDER FOR INHALATION
    active substance 2.0 mg
    lactose monohydrate to 5 mg
  • In Examples H, I, J, and K, the powder for inhalation is produced in the usual way by mixing the individual ingredients together.

Claims (48)

1. A compound of Formula (IA):
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00066
wherein:
R1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl or aryl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano or amino;
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, or C2-C5 alkynyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, amino, or oxo; and
R5 is a heteroaryl group optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 alkoxy, C2-8 alkenyloxy, C2-8 alkynyloxy, hydroxy, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or C1-C5 atkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
2. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, indenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl, chromanyl, dihydroindolyl, indolyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzothienyl, benzodioxolanyl, dihydrobenzoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzpyrazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, dihydroquinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, pyrimidinyl, or pyrazinyl each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, or amino;
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C6 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl or C2-C3 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently methyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or oxo; and
R5 is an imidazolyl, pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, diazaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, furanopyrimidinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, benzoxazolyl, oxazolopyridinyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolopyridinyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazolopyridinyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, phenyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C3 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C3 dialkylaminocarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, oxo, or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, C1-5 alkoxy, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, phenoxy, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, oxo or trifluoromethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
3. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is thienyl, phenyl, naphthyl, pyridinyl, chromanyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, oxo or cyano;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a spiro cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl; and
R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, phenyl, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, morpholinylcarbonyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, benzyl, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl or oxo;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
4. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl or pyridinyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, trifuoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, cyano or hydroxy;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
R4 is CH2; and
R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl, acetyl, formyl, methylsulfonyl or hydroxy,
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
5. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is a pyridinyl, is a phenyl substituted with a fluoro, is a phenyl substituted with a methoxy group and a fluoro, is a phenyl substituted with a hydroxy group and a fluoro, is a benzofuranyl group, is a dihydrobenzofuranyl group or is a dihydrobenzofuranyl group substituted with a cyano group,
R2 and R3 are each independently methyl;
R4 is CH2; and
R5 is a quinolinyl, azaindolyl, pyridinyl, benzimidazolyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl or cyano,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl, acetyl, formyl, methylsulfonyl or hydroxy,
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
6. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 11, wherein:
R1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, di-C1-C5alkyl-aminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl or aryl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3alkyl, C1-C3alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano or amino;
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, or C2-C5 alkynyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, or oxo;
R5 is a heteroaryl group optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, di-C1-C5 alkyl-aminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, or trifluoromethyl; and
R6 and R7 are hydrogen;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
7. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, indenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydroindolyl, dihydroquinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl or benzothienyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, or amino;
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C6 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl or C2-C3 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently methyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or oxo;
R5 is a pyridyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, phenyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or trifluoromethyl, and
R6 and R7 are hydrogen;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
8. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, pyridinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, hydroxy, or cyano;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a spiro cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl;
R5 is a pyridyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, phenyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano, or trifluoromethyl; and
R6 and R7 are hydrogen;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
9. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is phenyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo or hydroxy;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
R4 is CH2;
R5 is a pyridyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, or trifluoromethyl, and
R6 and R7 are hydrogen;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
10. The compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1, wherein:
R1 is phenyl substituted with a methoxy group and a fluoro, or is a phenyl substituted with a hydroxy group and a fluoro,
R2 and R3 are each independently methyl;
R4 is CH2;
R5 is a pyridyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro or chloro; and
R6 and R7 are hydrogen;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
11. A compound according to claim 1 selected from:
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-pyridin-2-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(2,6-Dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(4,6-Dimethyl-pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(6-Fluoro-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(4-Fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-Benzofuran-7-yl-1-(2,6-dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran-7-yl)-1-(6-fluoro-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-quinolin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(4-Fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
7-[3-Amino-3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl-butyl]-2,3-dihydro-benzofuran-5-carbonitrile;
1-(6-Fluoro-1H-benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
2-[3-Amino-3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl-butyl]4-fluoro-phenol;
1-(1H-Benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(1H-Indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3-pyridin-3-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(1H-Benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3-pyridin-4-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-Methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-pyridin-3-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(6-Fluoro-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3-pyridin-3-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran-7-yl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-methyl-amine;
Ethyl-[3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-amine;
[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-propyl-amine;
[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-isobutyl-amine;
Butyl-[3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-amine;
[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-dimethyl-amine;
N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-acetamide;
N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-formamide;
N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-methanesulfonamide;
1-(2,6-Dimethyl-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
2-[2-Amino-4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-4-methyl-2-trifluoromethyl-pentyl]-4-methyl-1H-indole-6-carbonitrile;
N-[3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butyl]-hydroxylamine; and
2-(3-Amino-4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl-3-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-butyl)-4-fluoro-phenol;
or the tautomers, prodrugs, solvates, or salts thereof.
12. A compound according to claim 1, selected from:
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-pyridin-2-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(2,6-Dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(4,6-Dimethyl-pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(6-Fluoro-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(4-Fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-Benzofuran-7-yl-1-(2,6-dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran-7-yl)-1-(6-fluoro-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-quinolin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(4-Fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
7-[3-Amino-3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl-butyl]-2,3-dihydro-benzofuran-5-carbonitrile;
1-(6-Fluoro-1H-benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methyl-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
2-[3-Amino-3-(1H-benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-4,4,4-trifluoro-1,1-dimethyl-butyl]-4-fluoro-phenol;
1-(1H-Benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-3-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(1H-Indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3-pyridin-3-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(1H-Benzoimidazol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3-pyridin-4-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-Methyl-1-(3-methyl-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-pyridin-3-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
1-(6-Fluoro-1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-3-pyridin-3-yl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
3-(2,3-Dihydro-benzofuran-7-yl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-1-trifluoromethyl-butylamine;
or the tautomers, prodrugs, solvates, or salts thereof.
13. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a compound according to claim 1, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
14. A method of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 1, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
15. A method of treating a disease-state or condition mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 1, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
16. A method of treating a disease-state or condition selected from: type II diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular diseases, hypertension, arteriosclerosis, neurological diseases, adrenal and pituitary tumors, and glaucoma, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 1, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
17. A method of treating a disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 1, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
18. The method according to claim 17, wherein the disease is selected from: (i) lung diseases; (ii) rheumatic diseases or autoimmune diseases or joint diseases; (iii) allergic diseases; (iv) vasculitis diseases; (v) dermatological diseases; (vi) renal diseases; (vii) hepatic diseases; (viii) gastrointestinal diseases; (ix) proctological diseases; (x) eye diseases; (xi) diseases of the ear, nose, and throat (ENT) area; (xii) neurological diseases; (xiii) blood diseases; (xiv) tumor diseases; (xv) endocrine diseases; (xvi) organ and tissue transplantations and graft-versus-host diseases; (xvii) severe states of shock; (xviii) substitution therapy; and (xix) pain of inflammatory genesis.
19. The method according to claim 17, wherein the disease is selected from: type I diabetes, osteoarthritis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, restenosis following percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, Alzheimer disease, acute and chronic pain, atherosclerosis, reperfusion injury, bone resorption diseases, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, thermal injury, multiple organ injury secondary to trauma, acute purulent meningitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, and syndromes associated with hemodialysis, leukopheresis, and granulocyte transfusion.
20. A method of treating a disease-state or condition mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising sequentially or simultaneously administering to the patient: (a) an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 1, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable glucocorticoid.
21. A kit for the in vitro diagnostic determination of the glucocorticoid receptor function in a sample, comprising:
(a) a diagnostically effective amount of a compound according to claim 1 or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and
(b) instructions for use of the diagnostic kit.
22. A method of making a compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1 wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen:
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00067
where R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are as defined in claim 1, the method comprising:
reacting a compound of Formula (V) with an organometallic reagent R5R4M where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form the compound of Formula (IA):
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00068
where R is alkyl and R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are as defined in claim 1.
23. A method of making a compound of Formula (IA) according to claim 1 wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen:
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00069
where R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are as defined in claim 1, the method comprising:
(a) reacting an ester of Formula (II) with a suitable reducing agent in a suitable solvent to form a diol of Formula (III)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00070
(b) reacting the diol of Formula (III) under suitable oxidative cleavage conditions to form a ketone of Formula (IV)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00071
(c) reacting the ketone of Formula (IV) with a suitable Lewis acid and an alkylsulfinamide of formula RS(O)NH2 where R is alkyl to form the compound of Formula (V)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00072
(d) reacting a compound of Formula (V) with an organometallic reagent R5R4M where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form the compound of Formula (IA):
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00073
(a′) reacting the trifluoroacetamide of Formula (XII) with a vinyl magnesium bromide bearing R2 and R3 of the formula R2R3CH═CHMgBr in a suitable solvent to provide the trifluoromethylenone of Formula (XIII)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00074
(b′) reacting the trifluoromethylenone of Formula (XIII) with a suitable organocopper reagent generated from an organometallic reagent R1M where M is Li or MgX and a copper salt CuX, where X is Cl, Br or I, in a suitable solvent to form the ketone of Formula (IV)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00075
and performing steps (c) and (d) as set forth above to form the compound of Formula (IA);
where R is alkyl and R1, R2, R3, R4, and R5 are as defined in claim 1.
24. A compound of Formula (IB):
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00076
wherein:
R1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl or aryl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano or amino.
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, or C2-C5 alkynyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, amino, or oxo;
R5 is a heteroaryl group optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, or trifluoromethyl;
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, C1-8 alkoxy, C2-8 alkenyloxy, C2-8 alkynyloxy, hydroxy, carbocyclyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, oxo, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
R8 is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, carbocycle, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R8 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, aminosulfonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, C1-C5 dialkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, oxo, trifluoromethyl, nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein R8 cannot be trifluoromethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
25. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, indenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl, chromanyl, dihydroindolyl, indolyl, dihydrobenzothienyl, benzothienyl, benzodioxolanyl, dihydrobenzoxazolyl, benzoxazolyl, benzisoxazolyl, benzpyrazolyl, benzimidazolyl, dihydroquinolinyl, quinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, isoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, furanyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, or pyrimidinyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, or amino;
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C6 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl or C2-C3 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently methyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or oxo;
R5 is an imidazolyl, pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, diazaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, furanopyrimidinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, thienopyrimidinyl, benzoxazolyl, oxazolopyridinyl, benzothiazolyl, thiazolopyridinyl, benzimidazolyl, imidazolopyridinyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, phenyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C1-C3 alkylaminocarbonyl, C1-C3 dialkylaminocarbonyl, heterocyclylcarbonyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, oxo or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, C1-5 alkoxy, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopropylethyl, cyclobutylethyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, phenoxy, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl, methoxy, halogen, hydroxy, cyano, oxo or trifluoromethyl;
R8 is C1-5 alkyl, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, or phenyl-difluoromethyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R8 is independently methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, or trifluoromethyl;
wherein R8 cannot be trifluoromethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
26. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, thienyl, naphthyl, chromanyl, pyridinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, hydroxy, oxo or cyano;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a spiro cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl;
R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzofuranyl, furanopyridinyl, benzothienyl, thienopyridinyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, phenyl, methoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, methylaminocarbonyl, dimethylaminocarbonyl, morpholinylcarbonyl, methoxy, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, C1-5 alkyl, benzyl, hydroxy or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R6 and R7 are independently methyl, or oxo; and
R8 is C1-5 alkyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl or benzyl,
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
27. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, benzofuranyl or pyridinyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, trifuoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, cyano or hydroxy;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
R4 is CH2;
R5 is a pyridinyl, indolyl, azaindolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano or trifluoromethyl,
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, butyl, isobutyl, acetyl, formyl, methylsulfonyl or hydroxy, and
R8 is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
28. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl substituted with a methoxy group and a fluoro, or is a phenyl substituted with a hydroxy group and a fluoro;
R2 and R3 are each independently methyl;
R4 is CH2;
R5 is a quinolinyl, azaindolyl, pyridinyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, trifluoromethyl or cyano;
R6 and R7 are each independently hydrogen, methyl or isobutyl; and
R8 is methyl, cyclopropyl, or cyclohexylmethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
29. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is an aryl or heteroaryl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, aryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl or aryl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently optionally substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3alkyl, C1-C3alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano or amino.
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C8 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, or C2-C5 alkynyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, hydroxy, halogen, or oxo;
R5 is a heteroaryl group optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, C1-C5 alkoxy, C2-C5 alkenyloxy, C2-C5 alkynyloxy, aryloxy, acyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5 alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyl, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkylaminocarbonyloxy, di-C1-C5 alkyl-aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, di-C1-C5 alkyl-aminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, trifluoromethylthio, nitro, or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups selected from C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy, oxo, cyano, amino, or trifluoromethyl;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen; and
R8 is C1-8 alkyl, C2-8 alkenyl, C2-8 alkynyl, carbocycle, heterocyclyl, aryl, heteroaryl, carbocycle-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 alkyl, aryl-C1-C8 haloalkyl, heterocyclyl-C1-C8 alkyl, heteroaryl-C1-C8 alkyl, carbocycle-C2-C8 alkenyl, aryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, heterocyclyl-C2-C8 alkenyl, or heteroaryl-C2-C8 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R8 is independently C1-C5 alkyl, C2-C5 alkenyl, C2-C5 alkynyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyl, phenyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, phenoxy, C1-C5 alkanoyl, aroyl, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C5alkanoyloxy, aminocarbonyl, C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyl, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyl, aminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyloxy, di-C1-C5alkylaminocarbonyloxy, C1-C5 alkanoylamino, C1-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, C1-C5 alkylsulfonylamino, C1-C5 alkylaminosulfonyl, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or nitro; or amino wherein the nitrogen atom is optionally independently mono- or di-substituted by C1-C5 alkyl; or ureido wherein either nitrogen atom is optionally independently substituted with C1-C5 alkyl; or C1-C5 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
wherein R8 cannot be trifluoromethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
30. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, naphthyl, indanyl, indenyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, dihydroindolyl, dihydroquinolinyl, dihydroisoquinolinyl, tetrahydroquinolinyl, tetrahydroisoquinolinyl, thienyl, furanyl, pyrrolyl, pyridinyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidinyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl or benzothienyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, C2-C3 alkynyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, C2-C3 alkenyloxy, C2-C3 alkynyloxy, C1-C3 alkanoyl, C1-C3 alkoxycarbonyl, C1-C3 alkanoyloxy, halogen, hydroxy, carboxy, cyano, trifluoromethyl, nitro, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone;
R2 and R3 are each independently hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a C3-C6 spiro cycloalkyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl or C2-C3 alkenyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R4 is independently methyl, hydroxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or oxo;
R5 is a pyridyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzothienyl, benzoxazolyl, benzothiazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently C1-C3 alkyl, C2-C3 alkenyl, phenyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, cyano, trifluoromethyl, or C1-C3 alkylthio wherein the sulfur atom is optionally oxidized to a sulfoxide or sulfone,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is optionally independently substituted with a substituent group selected from methyl, methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, or trifluoromethyl;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen; and
R8 is C1-5 alkyl, C2-5 alkenyl, cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl, benzyl, cyclopentylethyl, cyclohexylethyl, phenethyl, or phenyl-difluoromethyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R8 is independently methyl, methoxy, hydroxy, halogen, cyano, or trifluoromethyl;
wherein R8 cannot be trifluoromethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
31. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl, pyridinyl, dihydrobenzofuranyl, or benzofuranyl, each optionally independently substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methyl, ethyl, methoxy, ethoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo, hydroxy, or cyano;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl, or R2 and R3 together with the carbon atom they are commonly attached to form a spiro cyclopropyl or cyclobutyl ring;
R4 is C1-C3 alkyl;
R5 is a pyridyl, indolyl, benzofuranyl, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, phenyl, fluoro, chloro, cyano, or trifluoromethyl;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen; and
R8 is C1-5 alkyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentylmethyl, cyclohexylmethyl or benzyl,
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
32. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl substituted with one or two substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R1 is independently methoxy, fluoro, chloro, bromo or hydroxy;
R2 and R3 are each independently C1-C3 alkyl;
R4 is CH2;
R5 is a pyridyl, indolyl, benzimidazolyl, quinolinyl, or isoquinolinyl group, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro, chloro, or trifluoromethyl;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen; and
R8 is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, i-propyl, cyclopentylmethyl or cyclohexylmethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
33. A compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24, wherein:
R1 is phenyl substituted with a methoxy group and a fluoro, or is a phenyl substituted with a hydroxy group and a fluoro;
R2 and R3 are each independently methyl;
R4 is CH2;
R5 is a pyridyl or indolyl, each optionally independently substituted with one to three substituent groups,
wherein each substituent group of R5 is independently methyl, fluoro or chloro;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen; and
R8 is methyl or cyclohexylmethyl;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
34. A compound according to claim 24 selected from:
1-(2,6-Dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1,3-dimethyl-butylamine;
1-Ethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-butylamine;
1-Cyclohexylmethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-quinolin-4-ylmethyl)-1-cyclopentyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-1-cyclopentylmethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1,3-dimethyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-butylamine;
1-Cyclopropyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-butylamine;
3-(5-Fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1,3-dimethyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-butylamine;
1-Cyclopropyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2-ylmethyl)-butylamine;
2-[3-Amino-1,1,3-trimethyl-4-(1H-pyrrolo[2,3-c]pyridin-2-yl)-butyl]-4-fluoro-phenol;
2-[2-Amino-4-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-2,4-dimethyl-pentyl]-4-methyl-1H-indole-6-carbonitrile;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
35. A compound according to claim 24 selected from:
1-(2,6-Dichloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1,3-dimethyl-butylamine;
1-Ethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-1-quinolin-4-ylmethyl-butylamine;
1-Cyclohexylmethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-1-(1H-indol-2-ylmethyl)-3-methyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-quinolin-4-ylmethyl)-1-cyclopentyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-butylamine;
1-(2-Chloro-pyridin-4-ylmethyl)-1-cyclopentylmethyl-3-(5-fluoro-2-methoxy-phenyl)-3-methyl-butylamine;
or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
36. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective amount of a compound according to claim 24, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable excipient or carrier.
37. A method of modulating the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 24, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
38. A method of treating a disease-state or condition mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 24, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
39. A method of treating a disease-state or condition selected from: type II diabetes, obesity, cardiovascular diseases, hypertension, arteriosclerosis, neurological diseases, adrenal and pituitary tumors, and glaucoma, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 24, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
40. A method of treating a disease characterized by inflammatory, allergic, or proliferative processes, in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising administering to the patient an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 24, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof.
41. The method according to claim 40, wherein the disease is selected from: (i) lung diseases; (ii) rheumatic diseases or autoimmune diseases or joint diseases; (iii) allergic diseases; (iv) vasculitis diseases; (v) dermatological diseases; (vi) renal diseases; (vii) hepatic diseases; (viii) gastrointestinal diseases; (ix) proctological diseases; (x) eye diseases; (xi) diseases of the ear, nose, and throat (ENT) area; (xii) neurological diseases; (xiii) blood diseases; (xiv) tumor diseases; (xv) endocrine diseases; (xvi) organ and tissue transplantations and graft-versus-host diseases; (xvii) severe states of shock; (xviii) substitution therapy; and (xix) pain of inflammatory genesis.
42. The method according to claim 40, wherein the disease is selected from: type I diabetes, osteoarthritis, Guillain-Barre syndrome, restenosis following percutaneous transluminal coronary angioplasty, Alzheimer disease, acute and chronic pain, atherosclerosis, reperfusion injury, bone resorption diseases, congestive heart failure, myocardial infarction, thermal injury, multiple organ injury secondary to trauma, acute purulent meningitis, necrotizing enterocolitis, and syndromes associated with hemodialysis, leukopheresis, and granulocyte transfusion.
43. A method of treating a disease-state or condition mediated by the glucocorticoid receptor function in a patient in need of such treatment, the method comprising sequentially or simultaneously administering to the patient: (a) an effective amount of a pharmaceutically acceptable compound according to claim 24, or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and (b) a pharmaceutically acceptable glucocorticoid.
44. A kit for the in vitro diagnostic determination of the glucocorticoid receptor function in a sample, comprising:
(a) a diagnostically effective amount of a compound according to claim 24 or a tautomer, prodrug, solvate, or salt thereof; and
(b) instructions for use of the diagnostic kit.
45. A method of making a compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24 wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen:
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00077
where R1 is an optionally substituted 2-alkoxyphenyl group and R2, R3, R4, R5, and R8 are as defined in claim 24, the method comprising: reacting a compound of Formula (XIX) wherein each R is alkyl with a suitable organometallic reagent R5R4M where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form the compound of Formula (IB)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00078
46. A method of making a compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24 wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen:
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00079
where R1 is an optionally substituted 2-alkoxyphenyl group and R2, R4, R5, and R8 are as defined in claim 24, the method comprising:
(a) reacting an optionally substituted phenol of Formula (XIV) with an acryloyl chloride of Formula (XV) in the presence of a suitable base, followed by cyclization of the intermediate ester by treatment with a suitable Lewis acid to form a lactone of Formula (XVI)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00080
(b) reacting the lactone of Formula (XVI) with a suitable amine HNR″R′″, followed by treatment of the intermediate phenol with an alkyl halide RX, where R is alkyl and X is halogen, in the presence of a suitable base to form an amide of Formula (XVII)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00081
(c) reacting the amide of Formula (XVII) with a suitable organometallic reagent R8M, where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form a ketone of Formula (XVIII)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00082
(d) reacting the compound of Formula (XVIII) with an alkylsulfinamide RS(O)NH2 wherein R is alkyl, and a suitable Lewis acid to produce the compound of Formula (XIX)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00083
(e) reacting a compound of Formula (XIX) wherein each R is alkyl with a suitable organometallic reagent R5R4M where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form the compound of Formula (IB)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00084
47. A method of making a compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24 wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen:
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00085
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R8 are as defined in claim 24, the method comprising:
reacting a compound of Formula (XXIV) with an organometallic reagent R5R4M where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form the compound of Formula (IB):
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00086
where R is alkyl and R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R8 are as defined in claim 24.
48. A method of making a compound of Formula (IB) according to claim 24 wherein R6 and R7 are both hydrogen:
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00087
where R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R8 are as defined in claim 24, the method comprising:
(a′) reacting an amide of Formula (XXI) with a vinyl magnesium bromide bearing R2 and R3 of the formula R2R3CH═CHMgBr in a suitable solvent to provide an enone of Formula (XXII)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00088
(b′) reacting the enone of Formula (XXII) with a suitable organocopper reagent generated from an organometallic reagent R1M, where M is Li or MgX, and a copper salt CuX, where X is Cl, Br or I, in a suitable solvent to form a ketone of Formula (XXIII)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00089
(c′) reacting the compound of Formula (XXIII) with a suitable Lewis acid and an alkylsulfinamide of formula RS(O)NH2 where R is alkyl to form the compound of Formula (XXIV)
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00090
(d′) reacting a compound of Formula (XXIV) with an organometallic reagent R5R4M where M is Li or MgX and X is Cl, Br, or I, in a suitable solvent to form the compound of Formula (IB):
Figure US20060014787A1-20060119-C00091
where R is alkyl and R1, R2, R3, R4, R5 and R8 are as defined in claim 24.
US11/223,501 2002-06-06 2005-09-09 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof Abandoned US20060014787A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US11/223,501 US20060014787A1 (en) 2002-06-06 2005-09-09 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US38633402P 2002-06-06 2002-06-06
US10/446,355 US7074806B2 (en) 2002-06-06 2003-05-28 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US11/223,501 US20060014787A1 (en) 2002-06-06 2005-09-09 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/446,355 Division US7074806B2 (en) 2002-06-06 2003-05-28 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20060014787A1 true US20060014787A1 (en) 2006-01-19

Family

ID=29736154

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/446,355 Expired - Lifetime US7074806B2 (en) 2002-06-06 2003-05-28 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US11/223,501 Abandoned US20060014787A1 (en) 2002-06-06 2005-09-09 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US10/446,355 Expired - Lifetime US7074806B2 (en) 2002-06-06 2003-05-28 Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof

Country Status (6)

Country Link
US (2) US7074806B2 (en)
EP (1) EP1513810A1 (en)
JP (1) JP2005529165A (en)
AU (1) AU2003249669A1 (en)
CA (1) CA2486491A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2003104195A1 (en)

Cited By (19)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20040097574A1 (en) * 2002-08-29 2004-05-20 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20050176706A1 (en) * 2003-09-24 2005-08-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US20050203128A1 (en) * 2004-03-13 2005-09-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US20050282881A1 (en) * 2002-03-26 2005-12-22 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20060154925A1 (en) * 2004-12-27 2006-07-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20080009437A1 (en) * 2006-07-07 2008-01-10 Erning Xia Pharmaceutical Compositions and Method for Treating Dry Eye
US20080033008A1 (en) * 2006-08-07 2008-02-07 Ward Keith W Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, or ameliorating infections and sequelae thereof
US20080058373A1 (en) * 2006-08-31 2008-03-06 Bartels Stephen P Compositions and Methods for Treating or Preventing Glaucoma or Progression Thereof
US20080064721A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2008-03-13 Rohrs Brian R Compositions and Methods for Treating, Controlling, Reducing, Ameliorating, or Preventing Allergy
US20090042936A1 (en) * 2007-08-10 2009-02-12 Ward Keith W Compositions and Methods for Treating or Controlling Anterior-Segment Inflammation
US20090087443A1 (en) * 2007-09-27 2009-04-02 Bartels Stephen P Pharmacological Adjunctive Treatment Associated with Glaucoma Filtration Surgery
US20090239836A1 (en) * 2008-03-24 2009-09-24 Mary Lee Ciolkowski Multifunctional Ophthalmic Compositions
US20090291073A1 (en) * 2008-05-20 2009-11-26 Ward Keith W Compositions Comprising PKC-theta and Methods for Treating or Controlling Ophthalmic Disorders Using Same
US20090325988A1 (en) * 2008-06-06 2009-12-31 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid Mimetics, Methods of Making Them, Pharmaceutical Compositions and Uses Thereof
US20100197678A1 (en) * 2006-12-06 2010-08-05 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Glucocorticoid Mimetics, Methods of Making Them, Pharmaceutical Compositions and Uses Thereof
US20110077270A1 (en) * 2009-04-21 2011-03-31 Pfeffer Bruce A Compositions and Methods for Treating Ocular Inflammation with Lower Risk of Increased Intraocular Pressure
US20110105559A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2011-05-05 Rohrs Brian R Compositions and Methods for Treating, Controlling, Reducing, Ameliorating, or Preventing Allergy
US20110104159A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2011-05-05 Rohrs Brian R Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, ameliorating, or preventing allergy
WO2012170175A1 (en) 2011-06-07 2012-12-13 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, or ameliorating inflammatory pain

Families Citing this family (143)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CA2446904A1 (en) * 2001-05-24 2003-04-03 Alexza Molecular Delivery Corporation Delivery of drug esters through an inhalation route
US7645442B2 (en) 2001-05-24 2010-01-12 Alexza Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Rapid-heating drug delivery article and method of use
US7090830B2 (en) * 2001-05-24 2006-08-15 Alexza Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Drug condensation aerosols and kits
US20030051728A1 (en) * 2001-06-05 2003-03-20 Lloyd Peter M. Method and device for delivering a physiologically active compound
CA2472746A1 (en) * 2002-01-14 2003-07-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical formulations containing them and uses thereof
EP1490317A1 (en) * 2002-03-26 2004-12-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7186864B2 (en) * 2002-05-29 2007-03-06 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7074806B2 (en) 2002-06-06 2006-07-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
CA2496175A1 (en) 2002-08-21 2004-03-04 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Substituted hihydroquinolines as glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
CA2512257A1 (en) * 2003-01-03 2004-07-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1-propanol and 1-propylamine derivatives and their use as glucocorticoid ligands
US20040224992A1 (en) * 2003-02-27 2004-11-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
AR044519A1 (en) 2003-05-02 2005-09-14 Novartis Ag DERIVATIVES OF PIRIDIN-TIAZOL AMINA AND PIRIMIDIN-TIAZOL AMINA
GB0316290D0 (en) 2003-07-11 2003-08-13 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compounds
JP4468369B2 (en) * 2003-10-16 2010-05-26 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Stereoselective synthesis of certain trifluoromethyl-substituted alcohols.
US7625921B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2009-12-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7569689B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2009-08-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7273881B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2007-09-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7605264B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2009-10-20 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Heterocyclic modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7326728B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2008-02-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κβ activity and use thereof
US7253283B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2007-08-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Tricyclic modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
GB0401334D0 (en) 2004-01-21 2004-02-25 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
JP2007530541A (en) * 2004-03-22 2007-11-01 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム ファーマシューティカルズ インコーポレイテッド Α-Trifluoromethyl alcohol or amine as glucocorticoid mimetics
GB0411056D0 (en) 2004-05-18 2004-06-23 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
AR049384A1 (en) 2004-05-24 2006-07-26 Glaxo Group Ltd PURINA DERIVATIVES
TWI307630B (en) 2004-07-01 2009-03-21 Glaxo Group Ltd Immunoglobulins
GT200500281A (en) 2004-10-22 2006-04-24 Novartis Ag ORGANIC COMPOUNDS.
GB0424284D0 (en) 2004-11-02 2004-12-01 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
GB0426164D0 (en) 2004-11-29 2004-12-29 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
WO2006072599A2 (en) 2005-01-10 2006-07-13 Glaxo Group Limited Androstane 17-alpha carbonate derivatives for use in the treatment of allergic and inflammatory conditions
US7642273B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2010-01-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7361654B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2008-04-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Substituted heteroaryl amide modulators of glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7411071B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2008-08-12 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
US7317024B2 (en) 2005-01-13 2008-01-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Co. Heterocyclic modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor, AP-1, and/or NF-κB activity and use thereof
TWI370129B (en) * 2005-02-14 2012-08-11 Msd Oss Bv Non steroidal glucocorticoid receptor modulators
US20090176807A1 (en) * 2005-03-04 2009-07-09 John Robinson Regan Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
AR053346A1 (en) 2005-03-25 2007-05-02 Glaxo Group Ltd COMPOSITE DERIVED FROM 8H -PIRIDO (2,3-D) PIRIMIDIN -7 ONA 2,4,8- TRISUSTITUTED PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION AND USE TO PREPARE A COMPOSITION FOR TREATMENT AND PROFILXIS OF A DISEASE MEDIATED BY KINASE CSBP / RK / P38
UY29439A1 (en) 2005-03-25 2006-10-02 Glaxo Group Ltd NEW COMPOUNDS
GB0507577D0 (en) 2005-04-14 2005-05-18 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
GB0510390D0 (en) 2005-05-20 2005-06-29 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
GB0514809D0 (en) 2005-07-19 2005-08-24 Glaxo Group Ltd Compounds
CN101321726A (en) * 2005-09-30 2008-12-10 大日本住友制药株式会社 Novel fused pyrrole derivative
RU2421464C2 (en) 2005-10-21 2011-06-20 Новартис Аг Human il-13 antibodies and their therapeutic application
TW200730498A (en) 2005-12-20 2007-08-16 Glaxo Group Ltd Compounds
GB0526244D0 (en) 2005-12-22 2006-02-01 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
NZ570539A (en) 2006-01-24 2011-07-29 Janssen Pharmaceutica Nv 2-substituted benzimidazoles as selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMS)
GB0601951D0 (en) 2006-01-31 2006-03-15 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
WO2007091950A1 (en) * 2006-02-07 2007-08-16 Astrazeneca Ab Benzimidazoles and imidazopyridines useful in the treatment of diseases or disorders associated with cannabinoid receptor 2 (cb2) such as pain
BRPI0710240A2 (en) 2006-04-20 2011-08-09 Glaxo Group Ltd compound, use of a compound, method for treating a human or animal patient with a condition or disease, pharmaceutical composition, combination, and process for preparing a compound
NZ571429A (en) 2006-04-21 2011-09-30 Novartis Ag Purine derivatives for use as adenosine A2A receptor agonists
GB0611587D0 (en) 2006-06-12 2006-07-19 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compounds
RU2009115954A (en) 2006-09-29 2010-11-10 Новартис АГ (CH) Pyrazolopyrimidines as P13K Lipid Kinase Inhibitors
JP2010515729A (en) 2007-01-10 2010-05-13 アイアールエム・リミテッド・ライアビリティ・カンパニー Compounds and compositions as channel activating protease inhibitors
AR065804A1 (en) 2007-03-23 2009-07-01 Smithkline Beecham Corp COMPOSITE OF INDOL CARBOXAMIDE, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION THAT UNDERSTANDS IT AND USE OF THIS COMPOUND TO PREPARE A MEDICINAL PRODUCT
PL2155721T3 (en) 2007-05-07 2011-07-29 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
WO2009074575A2 (en) 2007-12-10 2009-06-18 Novartis Ag Organic compounds
JP5584138B2 (en) 2008-01-11 2014-09-03 ノバルティス アーゲー Pyrimidines as kinase inhibitors
SG190667A1 (en) 2008-05-23 2013-06-28 Panmira Pharmaceuticals Llc 5-lipoxygenase-activating protein inhibitor
EP2280959B1 (en) 2008-06-05 2012-04-04 Glaxo Group Limited 4-amino-indazoles
ES2566339T3 (en) 2008-06-05 2016-04-12 Glaxo Group Limited 4-Carboxamide indazole derivatives useful as PI3-kinase inhibitors
JP2011522860A (en) 2008-06-10 2011-08-04 ノバルティス アーゲー Pyrazine derivatives as epithelial sodium channel blockers
SI2391366T1 (en) 2009-01-29 2013-01-31 Novartis Ag Substituted benzimidazoles for the treatment of astrocytomas
WO2010094643A1 (en) 2009-02-17 2010-08-26 Glaxo Group Limited Quinoline derivatives and their uses for rhinitis and urticaria
WO2010102958A1 (en) 2009-03-09 2010-09-16 Glaxo Group Limited 4-oxadiazol-2 -yl- indazoles as inhibitors of p13 kinases
WO2010102968A1 (en) 2009-03-10 2010-09-16 Glaxo Group Limited Indole derivatives as ikk2 inhibitors
JP2012520845A (en) 2009-03-17 2012-09-10 グラクソ グループ リミテッド Pyrimidine derivatives used as Itk inhibitors
CA2755773A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2010-09-23 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. Rna interference mediated inhibition of btb and cnc homology 1, basic leucine zipper transcription factor 1 (bach 1) gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (sina)
US20120029054A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2012-02-02 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. RNA Interference Mediated Inhibition of GATA Binding Protein 3 (GATA3) Gene Expression Using Short Intefering Nucleic Acid (siNA)
EP2408458A1 (en) 2009-03-19 2012-01-25 Merck Sharp&Dohme Corp. RNA INTERFERENCE MEDIATED INHIBITION OF SIGNAL TRANSDUCER AND ACTIVATOR OF TRANSCRIPTION 6 (STAT6) GENE EXPRESSION USING SHORT INTERFERING NUCLEIC ACID (siNA)
EP2408916A2 (en) 2009-03-19 2012-01-25 Merck Sharp&Dohme Corp. RNA INTERFERENCE MEDIATED INHIBITION OF CONNECTIVE TISSUE GROWTH FACTOR (CTGF) GENE EXPRESSION USING SHORT INTERFERING NUCLEIC ACID (siNA)
US20120022142A1 (en) 2009-03-27 2012-01-26 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. RNA Interference Mediated Inhibition of Signal Transducer and Activator of Transcription 1 (STAT1) Gene Expression Using Short Interfering Nucleic Acid (siNA)
US20120004281A1 (en) 2009-03-27 2012-01-05 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp RNA Interference Mediated Inhibition of the Nerve Growth Factor Beta Chain (NGFB) Gene Expression Using Short Interfering Nucleic Acid (siNA)
AU2010229847A1 (en) 2009-03-27 2011-10-13 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp. RNA interference mediated inhibition of the intercellular adhesion molecule 1 (ICAM-1)gene expression using short interfering nucleic acid (siNA)
JP2012521760A (en) 2009-03-27 2012-09-20 メルク・シャープ・エンド・ドーム・コーポレイション RNA interference-mediated inhibition of apoptosis signal-regulated kinase 1 (ASK1) gene expression using small interfering nucleic acids (siNA)
US20120022143A1 (en) 2009-03-27 2012-01-26 Merck Sharp & Dohme Corp RNA Interference Mediated Inhibition of the Thymic Stromal Lymphopoietin (TSLP) Gene Expression Using Short Interfering Nucliec Acid (siNA)
WO2010122088A1 (en) 2009-04-24 2010-10-28 Glaxo Group Limited Pyrazole and triazole carboxamides as crac channel inhibitors
US8399436B2 (en) 2009-04-24 2013-03-19 Glaxo Group Limited N-pyrazolyl carboxamides as CRAC channel inhibitors
PL2899191T3 (en) 2009-04-30 2018-01-31 Glaxo Group Ltd Oxazole substituted indazoles as pi3-kinase inhibitors
US20110130591A1 (en) 2009-06-03 2011-06-02 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Steroselective synthesis of certain trifluoromethyl-substituted alcohols
US20110130567A1 (en) 2009-06-03 2011-06-02 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Steroselective synthesis of certain trifluoromethyl-substituted alcohols
US20100312013A1 (en) 2009-06-03 2010-12-09 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Steroselective synthesis of certain trifluoromethyl-substituted alcohols
US20110130578A1 (en) 2009-06-03 2011-06-02 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Stereoselective synthesis of certain trifluoromethyl-substituted alcohols
US8389526B2 (en) 2009-08-07 2013-03-05 Novartis Ag 3-heteroarylmethyl-imidazo[1,2-b]pyridazin-6-yl derivatives
AU2010283806A1 (en) 2009-08-12 2012-03-01 Novartis Ag Heterocyclic hydrazone compounds and their uses to treat cancer and inflammation
GEP201706639B (en) 2009-08-17 2017-03-27 Intellikine Llc Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
BR112012008061A2 (en) 2009-08-20 2016-03-01 Novartis Ag heterocyclic oxime compounds
AU2010290977B2 (en) * 2009-09-04 2015-07-16 Robert J. Davis Reversible oral adhesive gel
MX2012004792A (en) 2009-10-22 2013-02-01 Vertex Pharma Compositions for treatment of cystic fibrosis and other chronic diseases.
JP2013512878A (en) 2009-12-03 2013-04-18 グラクソ グループ リミテッド New compounds
WO2011067365A1 (en) 2009-12-03 2011-06-09 Glaxo Group Limited Benzpyrazole derivatives as inhibitors of p13 kinases
JP2013512880A (en) 2009-12-03 2013-04-18 グラクソ グループ リミテッド Indazole derivatives as PI3-kinase inhibitors
EP2512438B1 (en) 2009-12-16 2017-01-25 3M Innovative Properties Company Formulations and methods for controlling mdi particle size delivery
WO2011110575A1 (en) 2010-03-11 2011-09-15 Glaxo Group Limited Derivatives of 2-[2-(benzo- or pyrido-) thiazolylamino]-6-aminopyridine, useful in the treatment of respiratoric, allergic or inflammatory diseases
US8247436B2 (en) 2010-03-19 2012-08-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine and pyrazine derivative for the treatment of CF
GB201007203D0 (en) 2010-04-29 2010-06-16 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compounds
ES2602972T3 (en) 2010-09-08 2017-02-23 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited Indazole derivatives for use in the treatment of influenza virus infection
SI2614058T1 (en) 2010-09-08 2015-10-30 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited POLYMORPHS AND SALTS OF N-(5-(4-(5-(((2R,6S)-2,6-DIMETHYL-4-MORPHOLINYL)METHYL)-& xA;1,3-OXAZOL-2-YL)-1H-INDAZOL-6-YL)-2-(METHYLOXY)-3-PYRIDINYL)METHANESULFONAMIDE
UY33597A (en) 2010-09-09 2012-04-30 Irm Llc COMPOUNDS AND COMPOSITIONS AS INHIBITORS OF THE TRK
WO2012034095A1 (en) 2010-09-09 2012-03-15 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions as trk inhibitors
US8372845B2 (en) 2010-09-17 2013-02-12 Novartis Ag Pyrazine derivatives as enac blockers
WO2012035055A1 (en) 2010-09-17 2012-03-22 Glaxo Group Limited Novel compounds
WO2012052459A1 (en) 2010-10-21 2012-04-26 Glaxo Group Limited Pyrazole compounds acting against allergic, inflammatory and immune disorders
EP2630126B1 (en) 2010-10-21 2015-01-07 Glaxo Group Limited Pyrazole compounds acting against allergic, immune and inflammatory conditions
GB201018124D0 (en) 2010-10-27 2010-12-08 Glaxo Group Ltd Polymorphs and salts
US20130324526A1 (en) 2011-02-10 2013-12-05 Novartis Ag [1,2,4] triazolo [4,3-b] pyridazine compounds as inhibitors of the c-met tyrosine kinase
JP5808826B2 (en) 2011-02-23 2015-11-10 インテリカイン， エルエルシー Heterocyclic compounds and uses thereof
AU2012220572A1 (en) 2011-02-25 2013-08-29 Irm Llc Compounds and compositions as trk inhibitors
GB201104153D0 (en) 2011-03-11 2011-04-27 Glaxo Group Ltd Novel compounds
EP2683716A1 (en) 2011-03-11 2014-01-15 Glaxo Group Limited Pyrido[3,4-b]pyrazine derivatives as syk inhibitors
UY34305A (en) 2011-09-01 2013-04-30 Novartis Ag DERIVATIVES OF BICYCLIC HETEROCICLES FOR THE TREATMENT OF PULMONARY ARTERIAL HYPERTENSION
US9062045B2 (en) 2011-09-15 2015-06-23 Novartis Ag Triazolopyridine compounds
WO2013038373A1 (en) 2011-09-16 2013-03-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine amide derivatives
WO2013038378A1 (en) 2011-09-16 2013-03-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine amide derivatives
JP6165733B2 (en) 2011-09-16 2017-07-19 ノバルティス アーゲー N-substituted heterocyclylcarboxamides
WO2013038381A1 (en) 2011-09-16 2013-03-21 Novartis Ag Pyridine/pyrazine amide derivatives
US9034879B2 (en) 2011-09-16 2015-05-19 Novartis Ag Heterocyclic compounds for the treatment of CF
JP6130391B2 (en) 2011-11-23 2017-05-17 インテリカイン， エルエルシー Enhanced treatment regimen using MTOR inhibitors
US8809340B2 (en) 2012-03-19 2014-08-19 Novartis Ag Crystalline form
CN110507654A (en) 2012-04-03 2019-11-29 诺华有限公司 Combination with tyrosine kinase inhibitors and use thereof
US9073921B2 (en) 2013-03-01 2015-07-07 Novartis Ag Salt forms of bicyclic heterocyclic derivatives
EP2968340A4 (en) 2013-03-15 2016-08-10 Intellikine Llc Combination of kinase inhibitors and uses thereof
WO2014198909A1 (en) 2013-06-14 2014-12-18 INSERM (Institut National de la Santé et de la Recherche Médicale) Rac1 inhibitors for inducing bronchodilation
SG11201600028YA (en) 2013-09-22 2016-02-26 Calitor Sciences Llc Substituted aminopyrimidine compounds and methods of use
CA2923995A1 (en) 2013-10-17 2015-04-23 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited Pi3k inhibitor for treatment of respiratory disease
WO2015055691A1 (en) 2013-10-17 2015-04-23 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited Pi3k inhibitor for treatment of respiratory disease
TW201605450A (en) 2013-12-03 2016-02-16 諾華公司 Combination of Mdm2 inhibitor and BRAF inhibitor and their use
MX2016012574A (en) 2014-03-28 2017-09-26 Calitor Sciences Llc Substituted heteroaryl compounds and methods of use.
EP3134396B1 (en) 2014-04-24 2019-09-18 Novartis AG Amino pyridine derivatives as phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase inhibitors
EP3134397A1 (en) 2014-04-24 2017-03-01 Novartis AG Amino pyrazine derivatives as phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase inhibitors
BR112016023967A2 (en) 2014-04-24 2017-08-15 Novartis Ag pyrazine derivatives as phosphatidylinositol 3-kinase inhibitors
TW201625247A (en) 2014-05-12 2016-07-16 葛蘭素史密斯克藍智慧財產權有限公司 Pharmaceutical compositions for treating infectious diseases
WO2016011658A1 (en) 2014-07-25 2016-01-28 Novartis Ag Combination therapy
CA2954862A1 (en) 2014-07-31 2016-02-04 Novartis Ag Combination therapy
EP3347097B1 (en) 2015-09-11 2021-02-24 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Substituted aminopyrimidine derivatives as modulators of the kinases jak, flt3 and aurora
GB201602527D0 (en) 2016-02-12 2016-03-30 Glaxosmithkline Ip Dev Ltd Chemical compounds
US20190161480A1 (en) 2016-08-08 2019-05-30 Glaxosmithkline Intellectual Property Development Limited Chemical Compounds
GB201706102D0 (en) 2017-04-18 2017-05-31 Glaxosmithkline Ip Dev Ltd Chemical compounds
GB201712081D0 (en) 2017-07-27 2017-09-13 Glaxosmithkline Ip Dev Ltd Chemical compounds
WO2019099311A1 (en) 2017-11-19 2019-05-23 Sunshine Lake Pharma Co., Ltd. Substituted heteroaryl compounds and methods of use
KR20200112900A (en) 2018-01-20 2020-10-05 선샤인 레이크 파르마 컴퍼니 리미티드 Substituted aminopyrimidine compounds and methods of use thereof
BR112021024668A2 (en) 2019-06-10 2022-05-31 Novartis Ag Pyridine and pyrazine derivative for the treatment of CF, COPD and bronchiectasis
WO2021038426A1 (en) 2019-08-28 2021-03-04 Novartis Ag Substituted 1,3-phenyl heteroaryl derivatives and their use in the treatment of disease
TW202140550A (en) 2020-01-29 2021-11-01 瑞士商諾華公司 Methods of treating an inflammatory or obstructive airway disease using anti-tslp antibody
JP2023519585A (en) 2020-03-26 2023-05-11 グラクソスミスクライン、インテレクチュアル、プロパティー、ディベロップメント、リミテッド Cathepsin inhibitors to prevent or treat viral infections

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US105099A (en) * 1870-07-05 Improvement in paper-bag machines
US156311A (en) * 1874-10-27 Improvement in stereoscopes
US4880839A (en) * 1986-07-18 1989-11-14 Imperial Chemical Industries Plc Acyanilide derivatives
US5039691A (en) * 1989-06-08 1991-08-13 Marion Merrell Dow Inc. 5-(1-(imidazol)methyl)-3,3-disubstituted-2(3H)furanone derivatives
US5688810A (en) * 1994-12-22 1997-11-18 Ligand Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Steroid receptor modulator compounds and methods
US6323199B1 (en) * 1998-11-27 2001-11-27 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents
US6329534B1 (en) * 1999-09-01 2001-12-11 Abbott Laboratories Glucocorticoid receptor antagonists for treatment of diabetes
US6380223B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2002-04-30 Pfizer Inc. Glucocorticoid receptor modulators
US6436986B1 (en) * 1999-09-01 2002-08-20 Abbott Laboratories Glucocorticoid receptor antagonists for treatment of diabetes
US6506766B1 (en) * 1998-02-13 2003-01-14 Abbott Laboratories Glucocortiocoid-selective antinflammatory agents
US6583180B2 (en) * 2001-02-14 2003-06-24 Abbott Laboratories Glucocorticoid receptor modulators

Family Cites Families (21)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
NL8402755A (en) 1983-09-22 1985-04-16 Sandoz Ag AZOLIC DERIVATIVES, METHOD FOR PREPARING THE SAME, PREPARATIONS CONTAINING THEM, AND USE THEREOF
GB8406000D0 (en) 1984-03-07 1984-04-11 Ici Plc Olefine derivatives
GB8617653D0 (en) 1986-07-18 1986-08-28 Ici Plc Amide derivatives
GB2210875B (en) 1987-10-09 1991-05-29 Farmos Oy Aromatase inhibiting 4(5)-imidazoles
DE69533180T2 (en) 1994-12-22 2005-07-14 Ligand Pharmaceuticals, Inc., San Diego Steroid receptor modulator compounds and methods
JP2000504014A (en) 1996-01-30 2000-04-04 メルク エンド カンパニー インコーポレーテッド Farnesyl-protein transferase inhibitor
DE19723722A1 (en) 1997-05-30 1998-12-10 Schering Ag Nonsteroidal progestogens
JPH1180131A (en) 1997-09-01 1999-03-26 Mitsubishi Chem Corp Ethynylpyrimidine derivative
CO4980885A1 (en) 1997-12-29 2000-11-27 Ortho Mcneil Pharm Inc TRIPHENYL PROPANAMIDE COMPOUNDS USEFUL IN THE TREATMENT OF INFLAMMATIONS AND METHODS FOR PREPARING SUCH A COMPOUND
BR9907788A (en) 1998-02-13 2001-10-30 Abbott Lab Paraglycocorticoid selective anti-inflammatory agents
JP2002527355A (en) 1998-06-08 2002-08-27 カロ バイオ アクチェブラーグ Diabetes treatment
DE10038639A1 (en) 2000-07-28 2002-02-21 Schering Ag New and known N-aryl 2-hydroxy-omega-arylalkanamide derivatives, useful e.g. for treating inflammatory diseases such as rheumatism
US7030116B2 (en) 2000-12-22 2006-04-18 Aventis Pharmaceuticals Inc. Compounds and compositions as cathepsin inhibitors
WO2002051983A2 (en) 2000-12-22 2002-07-04 Axys Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Novel compounds and compositions as cathepsin inhibitors
ES2328795T3 (en) 2001-02-14 2009-11-18 Karo Bio Ab GLUCOCORTICOID RECEIVER MODULATORS.
CA2472746A1 (en) * 2002-01-14 2003-07-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical formulations containing them and uses thereof
ES2298508T3 (en) * 2002-03-26 2008-05-16 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc. GLUCOCORTICOID MIMETICS, METHODS TO PREPARE THEM, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND THEIR USES.
EP1490317A1 (en) * 2002-03-26 2004-12-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7186864B2 (en) * 2002-05-29 2007-03-06 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7074806B2 (en) 2002-06-06 2006-07-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
CN1678306A (en) * 2002-08-29 2005-10-05 贝林格尔·英格海姆药物公司 -3 (sulfonamidoethyl) -indole derivaties for use as glucocorticoid mimetics in the treatment of inflammatory, allergic and proliferative diseases

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US105099A (en) * 1870-07-05 Improvement in paper-bag machines
US156311A (en) * 1874-10-27 Improvement in stereoscopes
US4880839A (en) * 1986-07-18 1989-11-14 Imperial Chemical Industries Plc Acyanilide derivatives
US5039691A (en) * 1989-06-08 1991-08-13 Marion Merrell Dow Inc. 5-(1-(imidazol)methyl)-3,3-disubstituted-2(3H)furanone derivatives
US5688810A (en) * 1994-12-22 1997-11-18 Ligand Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Steroid receptor modulator compounds and methods
US6506766B1 (en) * 1998-02-13 2003-01-14 Abbott Laboratories Glucocortiocoid-selective antinflammatory agents
US6323199B1 (en) * 1998-11-27 2001-11-27 Schering Aktiengesellschaft Nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory agents
US6380223B1 (en) * 1999-04-30 2002-04-30 Pfizer Inc. Glucocorticoid receptor modulators
US6329534B1 (en) * 1999-09-01 2001-12-11 Abbott Laboratories Glucocorticoid receptor antagonists for treatment of diabetes
US6436986B1 (en) * 1999-09-01 2002-08-20 Abbott Laboratories Glucocorticoid receptor antagonists for treatment of diabetes
US6583180B2 (en) * 2001-02-14 2003-06-24 Abbott Laboratories Glucocorticoid receptor modulators

Cited By (31)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050282881A1 (en) * 2002-03-26 2005-12-22 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7932392B2 (en) 2002-03-26 2011-04-26 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US8212040B2 (en) 2002-03-26 2012-07-03 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and thereof
US20060189647A1 (en) * 2002-03-26 2006-08-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and thereof
US20040097574A1 (en) * 2002-08-29 2004-05-20 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20050176706A1 (en) * 2003-09-24 2005-08-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US8741897B2 (en) 2003-09-24 2014-06-03 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US20050203128A1 (en) * 2004-03-13 2005-09-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US7795272B2 (en) 2004-03-13 2010-09-14 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceutical, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US7741361B2 (en) 2004-12-27 2010-06-22 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20060154925A1 (en) * 2004-12-27 2006-07-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7635711B2 (en) 2004-12-27 2009-12-22 Boehringer-Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20060189646A1 (en) * 2004-12-27 2006-08-24 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20080009437A1 (en) * 2006-07-07 2008-01-10 Erning Xia Pharmaceutical Compositions and Method for Treating Dry Eye
US20080033008A1 (en) * 2006-08-07 2008-02-07 Ward Keith W Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, or ameliorating infections and sequelae thereof
EP2364707A2 (en) 2006-08-07 2011-09-14 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, or ameliorating infections and sequelae thereof
US20080058373A1 (en) * 2006-08-31 2008-03-06 Bartels Stephen P Compositions and Methods for Treating or Preventing Glaucoma or Progression Thereof
US20110104159A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2011-05-05 Rohrs Brian R Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, ameliorating, or preventing allergy
US20110105559A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2011-05-05 Rohrs Brian R Compositions and Methods for Treating, Controlling, Reducing, Ameliorating, or Preventing Allergy
US20080064721A1 (en) * 2006-09-11 2008-03-13 Rohrs Brian R Compositions and Methods for Treating, Controlling, Reducing, Ameliorating, or Preventing Allergy
US20100197678A1 (en) * 2006-12-06 2010-08-05 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Glucocorticoid Mimetics, Methods of Making Them, Pharmaceutical Compositions and Uses Thereof
US8658637B2 (en) 2006-12-06 2014-02-25 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US20090042936A1 (en) * 2007-08-10 2009-02-12 Ward Keith W Compositions and Methods for Treating or Controlling Anterior-Segment Inflammation
WO2009042377A1 (en) 2007-09-27 2009-04-02 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Pharmacological adjunctive treatment associated with glaucoma filtration surgery
US20090087443A1 (en) * 2007-09-27 2009-04-02 Bartels Stephen P Pharmacological Adjunctive Treatment Associated with Glaucoma Filtration Surgery
US20090239836A1 (en) * 2008-03-24 2009-09-24 Mary Lee Ciolkowski Multifunctional Ophthalmic Compositions
US20090291073A1 (en) * 2008-05-20 2009-11-26 Ward Keith W Compositions Comprising PKC-theta and Methods for Treating or Controlling Ophthalmic Disorders Using Same
US8268859B2 (en) 2008-06-06 2012-09-18 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US20090325988A1 (en) * 2008-06-06 2009-12-31 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Glucocorticoid Mimetics, Methods of Making Them, Pharmaceutical Compositions and Uses Thereof
US20110077270A1 (en) * 2009-04-21 2011-03-31 Pfeffer Bruce A Compositions and Methods for Treating Ocular Inflammation with Lower Risk of Increased Intraocular Pressure
WO2012170175A1 (en) 2011-06-07 2012-12-13 Bausch & Lomb Incorporated Compositions and methods for treating, controlling, reducing, or ameliorating inflammatory pain

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
US7074806B2 (en) 2006-07-11
US20040010148A1 (en) 2004-01-15
CA2486491A1 (en) 2003-12-18
WO2003104195A1 (en) 2003-12-18
JP2005529165A (en) 2005-09-29
EP1513810A1 (en) 2005-03-16
AU2003249669A1 (en) 2003-12-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US7074806B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7186864B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US7795272B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US7932392B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US6960581B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical formulations, and uses thereof
US7741361B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US6858627B2 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20040224992A1 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20050234091A1 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions and uses thereof
US20100317863A1 (en) Glucocorticoid Mimetics, Methods of Making Them, Pharmaceutical Compositions and Uses Thereof
US20040097574A1 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof
US20090176807A1 (en) Glucocorticoid mimetics, methods of making them, pharmaceutical compositions, and uses thereof

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STCB Information on status: application discontinuation

Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION